JP2022168191A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.

SOLUTION: In a game machine 10, a touch operation performance is executed when touch operation to a predetermined area in a front side of a pattern display part 341 is detected by detection sensors 38a to 38d during touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and a movable accessory performance in which a movable accessory member 39 is moved between a standby position and an operation position is executed. In the game machine 10, when presence of an object is detected by the detection sensors 38a to 38d during operation of the movable accessory member 39, execution of the touch operation performance is limited by preventing determination regarding whether the operation reception periods R1 to R4 for executing the touch operation performance is under continuation.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, as one of the game effects associated with the progress of a game, an effect called a gimmick is executed by activating a movable accessory member (for example, Patent Document 1 reference). Further, as a game effect, there is a game machine in which a touch operation effect is executed by touching the front side of a liquid crystal display device of a game machine within an operation acceptance period (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-136430 A JP 2017-055786 A

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of one of the first effect and the second effect in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play the jackpot game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position; The front view showing an example of the game board when the movable accessory member is in the operating position. FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing a detection range of each detection sensor of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a starting winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 11; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 22A shows an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between operation detection patterns and operation situations, and FIG. 22B shows a touch operation data table showing the relationship between touch operation detection patterns and touch operation situations. The figure which shows an example. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23, FIG. 24(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table, FIG. 24(B) FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation type table; FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type table referred to when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23; The figure which shows an example of movable accessory member operation|movement production. A timing chart showing an example of an operation timing of a movable accessory member and an example of a touch operation acceptance period together with a production pattern. A diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member actuation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member actuation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23 . A diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member actuation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member actuation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23 . A diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member actuation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member actuation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23 . FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a touch operation effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 23; FIG. The figure which shows an example of a touch operation production|presentation. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production|presentation selection table referred by the touch operation production|presentation determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production|presentation selection table referred by the touch operation production|presentation determination process of FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variable game effect processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; A flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 35 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; 11 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40(B) is the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40(A). The figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific production|presentation which is set. The front view showing an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 41; FIG. 42 is a front view schematically showing a detection range of a detection sensor with respect to the symbol display portion of the game machine shown in FIG. 41; FIG. 42 is a front view schematically showing a detection range of a detection sensor with respect to the display section of the sub-movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation detection processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 46A shows an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between main touch operation detection patterns and main touch operation states, and FIG. 46B shows the relationship between subtouch operation detection patterns and subtouch operation states. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a sub-touch operation data table; 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of movable accessory member actuation processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed with the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed with the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed with the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention; 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows an example of the variation game production performed with the gaming machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section of the main movable accessory member of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section of the main movable accessory member of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention; 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention; 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 123 is a view showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section of the sub-movable accessory member of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member actuation timing selection table referred to in the movable accessory member actuation timing determination process executed by the sound lamp control device for the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a fake actuation effect of a movable accessory member executed in a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention; 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device for the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of movable accessory member actuation processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device for the game machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device for the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous effect of a movable accessory member actuation effect and a touch operation effect executed in a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing a detection range of a detection sensor with respect to the symbol display portion of the gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention; 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of touch operation effect execution processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION First to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 37. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is operated by the player on the operation button 20 during a predetermined specific period in the variable game performance (informative game performance) executed in the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect etc. executed as a trigger.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the variable game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and includes variable game effect processing (see step S1707 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 35) and jackpot game effect processing (see step S1708 in FIG. 17). Executes an audio output effect for outputting audio in, for example. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the electric decoration section 27 incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and performs a lamp effect according to a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display section 37, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. be done.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 include openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. is formed. And on the back side of the game board 31, corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected. Incoming ball sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. Also, the through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 7) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317 . In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball hits to the right.

The entering ball sensors 313 a to 317 a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and detection results of the entering ball sensors 313 a to 317 a are input to the main control unit 331 . Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting game ball entry by other detection methods.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not to restrict entry of game balls into the second operating port 315. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Then, on the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . In the game board 31, the opening and closing door 316b is opened to allow game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening and closing door 316b restricts the entry of game balls to the variable winning opening 316. be.

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first operating hole 314, the second operating hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning hole 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating hole 314 or the second operating hole 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable winning hole 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the variable winning port 316 is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big winning lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes the 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and the 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning port 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning port 316 is performed five times. It is a game state including mode. The 16R variable jackpot game state is a game state including an opening and closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, and more than in the 5R jackpot game state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31 . The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and variation game according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 Various displays such as dramatic displays are performed. It should be noted that the pattern display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display sections separately from the pattern display section 341 . The sub-display section is arranged, for example, in the upper portion, the lower portion, the left portion, or the right portion of the pattern display portion 341 . The sub display portion may be movable between a position covering the pattern display portion 341 and a position not covering the pattern display portion 341 . Also, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper plate 23 . The sub-display section may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the pattern display section 341. FIG.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variation game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state where the main patterns of the same pattern are lined up on the effective line is displayed, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by the combination of main symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable big hit", the state where the symbol combination of "777", for example, which is set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable big hit among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the activated line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", a state in which the symbol combination such as "333", for example, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation big hit among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Alternatively, a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than a combination of symbols indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on an active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of symbols such as "222" and "444", which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main patterns, indicating a probability variable jackpot A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

Also, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variation display of the main symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. In addition, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state is displayed in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line, the 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestive effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the first actuation opening 314 . The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to the first operation opening 314 using a magnet is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. It should be noted that the magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning game balls that greatly exceed the upper limit number into the variable winning opening 316 is performed, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the first operating opening 314 and the second operating opening 315 . The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374. FIG. The LED pair 371 is triggered by the winning of the through gate 317, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessary 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern). On the 7-segment display 372, the winning of the first operation port 314 triggers the variable display of the symbols, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the big win lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the winning of the second operation port 315 triggers the variable display of the symbols, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the big win lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the pending number N and the pending number M of the variable display caused by winning the first actuation opening 314 and the second actuation opening 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

A plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d detect whether or not the player has touched a specific region corresponding to the predetermined region on the panel 25, for example, in a predetermined region on the front side of the pattern display section 341. or is detected. Further, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the player's touch operation on a predetermined area (a specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341, but also by holding a hand over the front side of the pattern display section 341. It may be possible to detect the actions of the player. As shown in FIGS. 4-7, the plurality of detection sensors 38a-38d includes an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d. Each detection sensor 38a-38d is, for example, an optical sensor. The optical sensor may be either a reflective sensor or a transmissive sensor, but a diffuse reflective sensor is preferably used. When reflective sensors are used as the detection sensors 38a to 38d, the presence of an object within the detection range is detected based on changes in the amount of reflected light received, for example.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6A, the upper left detection sensor 38a is arranged in or near the upper left portion of the periphery of the pattern display portion 341, and the lower left detection sensor 38b is arranged in the lower left portion of the periphery of the pattern display portion 341. The upper right detection sensor 38c is arranged at or near the upper right portion of the periphery of the pattern display portion 341, and the lower right detection sensor 38d is arranged at or near the lower right portion of the periphery of the pattern display portion 341. are placed.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d have different detection ranges for the presence of objects. If it is determined that an object exists in front of the pattern display section 341 when an object is detected by at least one detection sensor 38a to 38d of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, cross hatching is applied in FIG. The presence of an object on the front side of substantially the entire area of the pattern display portion 341 can be detected. On the other hand, when it is determined that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display section 341 when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the cross hatched pattern in FIG. The presence of an object on the front side of the central area of the display section 341 can be detected.

When judging whether or not an object exists on the front side of the pattern display portion 341, at least one detection sensor 38a to 38d out of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d detects the object from the width of the detection range of the object. is detected, it is preferable to determine that there is an object on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 provided with a so-called warp, two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d are provided in order to prevent erroneous detection that a player has performed a touch operation with a game ball that has passed through the warp. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 on the condition that the presence of the object is detected by . Also, as in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position and covers the upper part of the pattern display section 341, the two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d detect objects. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display section 341 on the condition that its existence is detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display section 341 when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d.

Of course, it may be determined that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display section 341 when an object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 exists in the standby position, all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d detect the presence of the object, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d You may make it detect existence of an object by some sensors among. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position, all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d detect the presence of the object, and the movable accessory member 39 is positioned at a position different from the standby position (operating position or standby position). The presence of the object may be detected by a part of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when the object exists at the intermediate position between the operating position and the operating position. Further, when some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are out of order, the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order may detect the existence of the object. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the power is turned on, each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d individually determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position. A check can be made to see if 38a-38d has failed. In addition, it is also possible to check whether the detection sensors 38a to 38d are malfunctioning or not during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, each detection sensor 38a determines whether an object exists based on the detection result of one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. 38d, it is also possible to check whether the detection sensors 38a to 38d operate normally.

Further, the detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the periphery of the pattern display portion 341, and may be arranged on the periphery of the pattern display portion 341 or the like. Furthermore, the number of detection sensors need only be one or more, and the number is not limited to four and may be any other number.

The movable accessory member 39 is positioned between a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the pattern display portion 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It can move up and down along the surface of the pattern display portion 341 . The operating position (see FIG. 5) is closer to the center of the pattern display section 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position (see FIG. 5), the coverage of the surface of the pattern display portion 341 is higher than when it is at the standby position (see FIG. 4). The movable accessory member 39 has a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the periphery. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged, and each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually. Also, each of the plurality of lamps 391 can be lit in a plurality of colors including, for example, white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture of these colors. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. Depending on the number of lights, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win lottery result of the big win lottery that triggered the variable game, or to clearly indicate the lottery result. For example, with respect to lighting colors, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for a big win in the order of white, yellow, green, and red. By doing so, it is also possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win. In addition, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position, but the lamp 391 exposed from the opening 31A is used to indicate that the lottery result of the big winning lottery is a big win. It is also conceivable to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a big win is expected depending on which lamp 391 among these lamps 391 is lit. It can be considered to suggest the degree of Also, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is conceivable to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by an image displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 26(C) described later).

The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Also, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39 . Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be one in which a plurality of separated movable members are combined, one that can be transformed into two or more forms, or one that has a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering part of the display screen of the pattern display section 341, and may cover the entire display screen. Also, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illumination portion that can be turned on and off. In this case, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win by lighting up or blinking the illumination portion, or to execute an effect that clearly indicates a big win (see FIG. 26(D) described later).

Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled so as to operate in an effect for showing the lottery result of a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a confirmation performance indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, and is also operated as a chance-up performance for improving the expectation that the lottery result is a big win. There are many things. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 is used for the jackpot game, in addition to the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the variable game effect. It is also possible to operate as a reserved consecutive house fixing performance for informing that the reserved games whose execution of the variable game is reserved include those whose lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. have The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. or downward from the operating position to the standby position. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position to the standby position by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction. moved to position.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection section 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to the control instruction from the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Also, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result of the return detection section 39b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. The motor 39 a and the return detection unit 39 b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5 .

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 7 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of main control means of the present invention. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display section 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. to judge. The MPU 41 also determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36 . Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is issued at step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. is set in Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b described later increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the variation pattern, and This command notifies the audio lamp controller 5 of the pending number N or the pending number M. FIG. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in a pending storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (the first pending command in FIG. 12). step S1207 or step S1209 of the pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the pass/fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs a main timer interrupt (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the main control units in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electrician reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341. be Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the open state are set. and a normal winning initial value counter CIN2 used for . Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game in which the 7-segment display 372 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. be. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the 7 segment display 373 displays and stops is referred to as the second special symbol game. be.

Then, when the game ball enters the first operation opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second operation opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) are individually set for each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB. may be provided in

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area of the first reservation storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, it is executed based on the success/failure information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game to be played, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 .

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first operation port 314, the success or failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. stored in the area where In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when the game ball enters the second operation port 315, the success/failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4, the first operation port 314 And it is possible to reserve up to four win/fail information as the winning history of the game ball to the second operation port 315, respectively.

In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first working port 314 and the second working port 315 are provided with a maximum number of reserved areas of eight in common. It is possible to reserve win/fail information as a prize history. The processing for storing the win/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the win/fail information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the success/failure information in the first pending area REA1 of the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA and the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the second pending storage area REB is 2 or more. , it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success/failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REA1. The success/failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REB1. The success/failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is determined by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area in the ROM 411, which is a low probability mode (first information game state) that is a normal game state and a high probability mode (second game state) that is a variable game state. Two types are set corresponding to the information game state). Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability mode is a big hit is two (0, 1) out of random numbers 0 to 637. In the high probability mode, the number of random numbers for which the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win is 20 (0 to 19) out of random numbers 0 to 637. That is, the low-probability mode has a jackpot probability of 1/319 (2/638), and the high-probability mode has a jackpot probability of 1/31.9 (20/638), which is ten times the low-probability mode.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, two random numbers (0, 1) that result in a big win in the jackpot lottery are common, but they may not be common. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than those random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers to be a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers to be a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 of 10-14, and the number of random numbers for 5R normal jackpot is 5 of 15-19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5, 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10, 5 to 14. There are 5 random numbers from 15 to 19, which are usually the 5R jackpots. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability variable time-saving gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state such as the normal time-saving gaming state and the normal non-time-saving gaming state, the acquisition expected value of the game ball when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher. ing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the first operation opening 314 which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game by winning the game ball, and the second operation opening which is an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game by winning the game ball An individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but the first special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", "5R normal It is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable short time mode which is a high-probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. Then, the probability variable time saving mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variable big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is executed in the normal short-time mode, which is a low-probability mode with a low probability of winning the jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. Then, the high-frequency support mode in the normal time-saving mode continues until the jackpot lottery of a preset number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times, is completed.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big hit is completed, a preset number of times (eg, 50 times, 100 times) jackpot lottery is executed in a variable time-saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then transitions to low probability mode, and high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variable time saving mode to the normal time saving mode or the low probability mode in the variable game as another embodiment. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the jackpot game state and the high-frequency support mode are not entered. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the same reach occurs. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of the three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win. Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation, a story production process, an operation of the operation button 20 by the player, or a specific area of the panel 25. A player-participation type operation effect process or the like is executed in which the touch operation is reflected in the effect. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the type of variation pattern, the sound ramp control device 5 provides high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects (first development effects), super reach effects (second development effects). ), a special ready-to-win effect (second development effect), etc. are determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIG. 9(E), FIG. 9(F) and FIG. 9(G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table and an off variation table. As shown in FIG. 9 (E), FIG. 9 (F) and FIG. 9 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preset according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. are mapped. Then, the MPU 41 provides a normal jackpot variation table when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variable jackpot variation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "outside", each outage variation table is referenced to specify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9 (E) and 9 (F), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a normal ready-to-win effect pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24(B)), A normal ready-to-win effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 . The normal reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win production pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type) (see FIG. 24(B)), A super ready-to-win effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 . The super ready-to-win effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 27). Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the special ready-to-win effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds is determined as the variation type (effect pattern type) in the sound ramp control device 5 (see FIG. 24(B). ), the special ready-to-win effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 . The special reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect (see FIG. 27).

As shown in FIG. 9(G), in the loss variation table, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding relationship with the variation pattern are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or front-rear out-of-rear reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 7 seconds as a variation type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (B)), and the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 27). Further, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (B)), and the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 27).

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is stopped without a notice effect such as displaying a character, message, etc. is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "05", there is a variation display of the failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped with a symbol, accompanied by an advance notice effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. In addition, when the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation-type operation effect that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 or the touch operation on the specific area of the panel 25 is announced. It is sometimes performed as a performance.

The type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9(E) to 9(G). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01". A normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. Any Super Reach effect that has been done is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win effects to be executed in the special ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03". Any of the special reach effects that have been performed are executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

Note that the production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation production in which the operation status of the player's touch operation on the operation button 20 or the specific area of the panel 25 is reflected in the production, for example, a single operation in which a single operation is reflected in the production. Player-participation type operation presentation such as production, continuous hitting operation production in which the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, and long-pressing operation production in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341, it issues a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Input to the audio lamp controller 5 . Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a variation pattern command " A01” to “A03” are output. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "C03". In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 provides variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating failure in front of the variation patterns "01" to "05". output either As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , turn off the light.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display section 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the pattern display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display section 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the flashing mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like based on commands input from the main control device 4. In addition, the MPU 51 can operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) by controlling the motor 39a through the motor driver 39c, and acquires the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Furthermore, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20a, the upper left detection sensor 38a, the lower left detection sensor 38b, the upper right detection sensor 38c, and the lower right detection sensor 38d. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated and that a specific area of the panel 25 has been touched, and based on the detection results, displays the pattern display unit. It is also possible to control the image game effect executed in 341, the operation effect of the movable accessory member 39, the sound output effect of outputting the sound from the speaker 26, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 .

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 24 (B))), and The type of effect (see FIGS. 25A to 25C) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S2203 to (see S2207), and the pattern display section 341 starts the pattern variation display. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main patterns corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when it indicates a 5R probability variable jackpot, a combination of main patterns corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot. is displayed, and if the 16R probability variable jackpot is shown, the 5R normal jackpot,

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 , and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores variable symbols such as the main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a ready-to-win effect image, a big win effect image, a losing effect image, a touch operation acceptance effect image, a touch A plurality of types of images such as operation effect images are stored. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be paid out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving section 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with the thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when receiving a power failure signal from the power control device 9, interrupts the control being executed and executes a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 10 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S<b>1001 , the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors or switches connected to the main controller 4 . For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, and the radio wave sensor 36 are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start winning processing associated with the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process to enable the launch of the . Further, the shooting control process disables the shooting of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery for whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the electric role open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and loses when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. We judge that it is. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and is lost when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. We judge that it is. Then, when the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined in the through gate process, the electric accessary 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operation port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

[Start winning process]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S<b>1101 , the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 314 . Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the first operation opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not entered the first operation opening 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and a variation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 13 and S1310), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the variation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. A first pending command setting process for setting the first pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not entered the second operation opening 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 13 and S1310), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB in the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, before the propriety information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing described later (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16), the propriety information The content is confirmed, and the second reserved command setting process is executed to set the second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 12, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second pending command setting process, the "first pending command" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), variation pattern and information such as the number of pending N .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of reservations N from the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation from the RAM412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202 : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 13) in the main processing described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag which is set to OFF when transitioning to another game state such as state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9B). Execute the suitability judgment. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning, based on the low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 9A). Execute the yes/no decision.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to winning the jackpot (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the success/failure information is stored in the third reservation area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. Value is read. In addition, among the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, the reservation area in which the success/failure information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 11 can be determined by the value of the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA. be.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number N contained in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 corresponds to the right/fail information stored in the first reservation command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 together with the command of . Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 are executed as regular processes with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next period. be.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Execute the process. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are set in the RAM 412 , the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command required for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 is the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 316b for the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, thereby causing the shift to the jackpot game as a result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type). For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery results of the jackpot lottery in steps S1602 and S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 changes the game state to a jackpot game state having an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. The normal non-time-saving game state, which is a support mode, or the normal non-time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode and is not a high-frequency support mode, is shifted to.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variable game for notifying the lottery result ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery which triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable short-time game state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. , the state is shifted to the normal time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the probability variable time-saving game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the probability variable time-saving game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

<Step S1307>
In step S<b>1307 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the main display section 37 . By this display control processing, the 7-segment display devices 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 perform the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a pattern indicating the lottery result. A stop display will be displayed. In addition, by the display control processing, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, and the presence or absence of normal symbol winning is indicated by turning on and off the pair of LED lamps. is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of Incidentally, in the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b associated with the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and the processes after S1301 described above are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes), steps S1308, S1309 and S1310 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1309>
At step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variation game control process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 13 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), ends the variation game control process, and is not in the jackpot game. If so (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to ON when transitioning to the jackpot game state in the game state transition processing in the main processing of FIG. 13, for example, and set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not during symbol variation display is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. This determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of the process.

<Step S1403>
At step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. Then, when it is determined that the variation display time has not passed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 is the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the pending storage area 412b, the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform variation display based on the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE, and terminates the variation game control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. do. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE The pass/fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves when both or one of the pending number M and the pending number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 13, is set to ON. . When the game state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and when the game state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the game state is the low probability mode. If so, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41, based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)), the counter of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b. Whether or not the value is a value corresponding to winning the jackpot is determined. On the other hand, in step S1604, the MPU 41, based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)), the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b. It is determined whether or not the counter value of is a value corresponding to the winning of the jackpot.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game to the variable display time counter. Specifically, the MPU 41, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, changes the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9(E)). Identify. In addition, MPU41, when the result of the success or failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9 (F)) to specify the variation pattern based on . Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 9(G)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command including the lottery result of the big winning lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 5, and the audio ramp control device 5 displays the pattern based on the variation pattern command. Symbol variation display by the unit 341 and the like are executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that the 5R normal jackpot is "A01" to " A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot to the variation patterns "01" to "03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot "C01" to "C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the variation patterns "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating failure to the variation patterns "01" to "08". It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
At step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 37, and terminates the variation start process. When starting the variable display of symbols on the main display section 37, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 38. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the secondary timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), touch operation detection processing (step S1703), touch operation detection pattern Determination processing (step S1704), counter update processing (step S1705), command determination processing (step S1706), variation game effect processing (step S1707), and jackpot game effect processing (step S1708) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. Also, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third operation detection flag, and the operation button operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the operations of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 for the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals is set to the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as an operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. set a flag. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has been started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1902, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1902. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the process proceeds to step S1903. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 continues when the operation pattern of "on", "on", and "on" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. , the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. is determined (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the process proceeds to step S1906. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1907, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the process proceeds to step S1907. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operating state of the operating button 20 from the non-operating state to the operating state (operating state) when the operating pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the operating button 20 three times. has started), the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first and third operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operating state of the operating button 20 from the operating state to the non-operating state (operating state) when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the operating button 20 three times. has ended), the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first and second operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "off", "off", and "off", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 22(A)). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Touch operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection process, based on the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, a touch operation state on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is detected. A process for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories with respect to a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) (for example, the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 6C) on the front side of is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the front face of the pattern display unit 341 is displayed at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. It is determined whether or not the player has performed a touch operation on a predetermined area on the side (a specific area on the panel 25).

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second touch operation detection flag to the first touch operation detection flag. Also, in step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third touch operation detection flag to the second touch operation detection flag. After that, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the detection result of the presence of the object detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d to the third touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation detection process ends. For example, when the existence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 determines that an object exists in a specific area (predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341) on the panel 25 ( is touched by the player). Conversely, when the presence of an object is not detected by one or more of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 detects an object in a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341. does not exist (the player has not performed a touch operation).

As described above, in the touch operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, the touch operation history for the predetermined area (the specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is the most recent touch operation history at 1 msec intervals. Touch operation states for three times are stored in the RAM 512 as first to third touch operation detection flags. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as a third touch operation detection flag, the touch operation state immediately before is stored as a second touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation two times before is stored as a first touch operation detection flag. The operating state is stored.

[Touch operation detection pattern determination processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection pattern determination process, a predetermined area (panel pattern) on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is determined based on the touch operation history determined based on the first touch operation detection flag, the second touch operation detection flag, and the third touch operation detection flag. 25) to set a touch operation pattern flag for determining the touch operation state. The touch operation pattern flag consists of first to third touch operation pattern flags, and depending on the combination of ON and OFF of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) is displayed. It is possible to determine the touch operation state for . For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when only the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, a touch operation on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is performed. can be determined to continue. Further, when only the second touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that a touch operation on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 has started. Further, when only the third touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on the predetermined area (the specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 has ended. When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it is determined that no touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 (a specific area on the panel 25). can.

<Steps S2101 to S2105>
As shown in FIG. 21, in steps S2101 to S2105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation detection flag for the touch operation detection process two before is set to ON. It is determined whether or not the second touch operation detection flag for the latest touch operation detection process is set to ON.

<Steps S2107 to S2110>
In steps S2107 to S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first to third touch operation pattern flags based on the determination result of whether or not the first to third touch operation detection flags are ON in steps S2101 to S2105. Set on or off.

Specifically, in step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. . That is, when the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern of "off", "on", and "on" as three touch operation states on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341, , the second touch operation pattern flag is set because it can be determined that the non-touch operation state has changed to the touch operation state (the touch operation has started) with respect to the predetermined area (the specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341. It is set to ON, and the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

Also, in step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, when the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern of "on", "on", and "on" as operation states for three times on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341, Since it can be determined that the touch operation state on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 (specific area on the panel 25) continues, the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, the second touch operation pattern flag and the The third touch operation pattern flag is set to OFF (see FIG. 22(B)).

Also, in step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, when the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern of "on", "off", and "off" as three touch operation states on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341, The third touch operation pattern flag is turned on because it can be determined that the touch operation state has changed to the non-touch operation state (the touch operation has ended) with respect to the predetermined area (the specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341. The first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

Also, in step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag, the second touch operation pattern flag, and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern other than the above, such as "off", "off", and "off", as a touch operation state for three times on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341. In this case, all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22(B)). When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is in a non-touch state.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the counter update process (step S1705), the MPU 51 updates the production pattern type counter, the variable display counter, the first to fourth touch operation production type counters, the specific production type counter, and the like. Run. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the production pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first to fourth touch operation effect type counters updated here are touch operations on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Used to determine the type of touch operation effect executed by the operation. For example, the first touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 39, the second touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 59, and the third touch operation effect type The counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-79, and the fourth touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The specific effect type counter updated here is the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 during the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4 during execution of the super ready-to-win effect and special ready-to-win effect. is detected, it is used to determine the specific effect type to be executed instead of the touch operation effect. For example, the specific effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S1706), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S1706 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2201: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Note that the commands stored in the unprocessed command storage area are deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2201 and is subject to processing. remembered.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2203, and if the received command is not a variation pattern command (step S2202: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines the stop symbol combination of the main symbols and the variation type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 24 (A)) and the variation type table (see FIG. 24 (B)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the RAM 512 The stop symbol combination and the variation type (effect pattern) of the main symbols are determined based on the counter value of the effect pattern type counter. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to ON. is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that In the production pattern type table, the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production (see FIG. 27) Normal reach production pattern type table (see FIG. 25 (A)), the final individual production type in the variable game production A super reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25 (B)) that is a super reach effect (see FIG. 27), a special reach effect pattern type in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect (see FIG. 27) A table (see FIG. 25(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 24A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 24A, in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 24(A) shows that the main symbols are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination indicating that "333" is a definite variable jackpot (either 5R definite variable jackpot or 16R definite variable jackpot), "777 ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and from the main symbols other than "3" and "7" The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable big win", double symbol combinations other than "333" whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a main pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop pattern, in the jackpot game that shifts after the end of the variation game, A promotion presentation is executed to indicate that the lottery result is a ``5R probability variable jackpot''.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9" Design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the main symbol is a symbol combination other than "777" which suggests 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a main symbol other than "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the lottery result is "16R" in the jackpot game that shifts after the end of the variation game. A promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a "probable variable jackpot" is executed.

Then, when the lottery result is a big hit and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the variation game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", all the main symbols "1" to "9" are sorted, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "loss", the information on the failure type selected based on the failure type table (see FIG. 9(D)) and the previously determined A second stop symbol is determined based on the first stop symbol. For example, when the losing type is the front and back out reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of main symbols and stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbols are determined by the sound ramp control device 5, and the second stop symbols and the final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

Also, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 24B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". In addition, the variation pattern command "B02" with the lottery result "5R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". A variation pattern command "C03" having a lottery result of "16R probability variable jackpot" and a variation pattern of "03" is associated with a variation display time of "90 s" and a variation type of "special ready-to-win effect pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" with the lottery result "loss" and the variation pattern "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "D05" with the result "off" and the variation pattern "05" is associated with the variation display time "10 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 25(A) to 25(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 25 (A) is a normal reach production pattern type table referred to when the final individual production type in the variable game production is a normal reach production (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25 (B) is a variable game It is a super reach effect pattern table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. (See FIG. 27) This is a special ready-to-win effect pattern table referred to in the case of (see FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 25, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type table shown in FIG. 25 (A), according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss), as the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal ready-to-win effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. do. Here, the production patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type table are productions in which, for example, a normal ready-to-win production is executed in which the main symbol is in a ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the main symbol changes at high speed, This is an effect in which the final individual effect type is a normal ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 27).

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. there is Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super ready-to-win effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and the final individual production type is higher than the normal ready-to-win production, This is an effect that develops into a super ready-to-win effect with a longer effect execution time than the normal ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 27). Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into the super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the special ready-to-win effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. there is Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the special ready-to-win effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are performed as the final individual production type. This is an effect that develops into a special ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect and a longer effect execution time than the normal ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 27). The special reach effect pattern table may include a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. good.

Then, the MPU 51 stores the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, the effect type counter, and the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512. set.

<Step S2204>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2204, the MPU 51 executes a movable accessory member operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 (execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect). In the movable accessory member actuation timing determination process, based on the movable accessory member actuation timing selection table selected according to the effect pattern type determined in step S2203, the movable accessory member 39 at each of a plurality of actuation timings. Determines whether or not to operate (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect).

Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the movable accessary member actuation effect. The movable accessory member activation effect is executed as a chance-up effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be a big win, or a confirmation effect (one-shot announcement effect) that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big win. be. This movable accessory member operation effect is performed from a standby position where the movable accessory member 39 does not hinder visual recognition of the image effect executed by the pattern display section 341 shown in FIG. After moving to the operating position, which is the front of the central portion of the portion 341, it returns to the standby position shown in FIG. 26(A).

In the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is stopped for a certain period of time at the operating position shown in FIG. 26(B). At this time, in the movable accessory member 39, a plurality of lamps 391 provided in an annular shape on the peripheral edge part suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win, or that the lottery result is a big win. to be specified. For example, the lighting color of a plurality of lamps 391 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the lottery result of the big win lottery. Specifically, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 are set in order of white, yellow, green, and red so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in the order, and the movable accessory member 39 is displayed in the movable accessory member operation presentation. While stopped at the standby position shown in 26(B), a plurality of lamps 391 are lit in the lighting color of the degree of expectation of big win determined according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In addition, the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 may include all of white, yellow, green and red, thereby clearly indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. By appropriately setting the color, a rainbow lamp effect may be executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a big win.

Of course, regardless of the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of lamps 391 may indicate the degree of expectation for a big win or indicate that a big win has occurred. Also, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position shown in FIG. In the effect presentation in this case, the degree of expectation for a big win can be indicated by the color and size of the effect, or the fact that a big win is expected can be clearly indicated.

In addition, when executing the movable accessory member actuation effect, it is conceivable to execute a chance effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit by using the pattern display section 341 . For example, as shown in FIG. 26C, before moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, the four lamps 391 arranged in the portion exposed from the opening 31A of the movable accessory member 39 are It is conceivable that an effect in which an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win or an image suggesting future development of the effect is displayed on the pattern display portion 341 correspondingly. In FIG. 26(C), the order from the left side of the pattern display portion 341 is "?", "Chance" (suggestion of expectation for big win), "Reach" (suggestion of performance development), and "Gekiketsu" (suggestion of expectation for big win). is displayed. Then, in the movable accessory portion 39, a roulette performance is executed in which one lamp 391 is turned on after the four lamps 391 are blinked. In addition, in FIG. 26C, the lamp 391 corresponding to "chance" is turned on to indicate the state.

Further, when the roulette effect shown in FIG. 26(C) is executed, the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, so that the plurality of lamps 391 of the movable accessory member 39 are used to It is also conceivable to execute a production that suggests or a definite production that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the jackpot expectation is suggested according to the number of lamps 391 lit (the larger the number of lamps lit, the higher the jackpot expectation), and all the lamps 391 are lit. It is also conceivable to make it a big hit confirmation effect when it is done. In the following description, an effect that indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot by means of a movable accessory effect may be referred to as a “one-shot notification effect”.

In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position, when the effect indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit is executed by the number of lighting of the lamps 391 (except for the one-shot notification effect), the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position. When returning, a development effect such as a super ready-to-win effect or a special ready-to-win effect may be executed. In this case, the number of lights of the lamps 391 when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position and the expectation level of the big win suggested by the development effect (for example, the expectation level of the development effect displayed at the start of execution of the development effect). number of stars shown, etc.). In other words, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is conceivable to first suggest the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the development effect to be executed later by the number of lighting lamps 391 . For example, when the expectation level of the jackpot in the development production is indicated by the number of stars (for example, the number of stars is 1 to 5), and the development production with 3 stars is executed as the development production, the movable accessory member 39 is operated. It is conceivable that the number of lights of the lamps 391 is set to three when they are in the position.

Further, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the center part of the movable accessory member 39 may be lit to emphasize that the final effect is being performed. Then, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position, the fluctuation of the main pattern may be stopped at doubles, or the fluctuation of the main pattern may be continued. Then, the main symbol may be stopped at double eyes later. Whether or not the fluctuation of the main pattern is stopped when the movable accessory member 39 returns after the execution of the one-shot notification effect is determined by the relationship between the determined effect pattern and the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. be done.

Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position, it is conceivable to execute an effect in which an image that produces an effect around the movable accessory member 39 is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . In this case, it is conceivable that the color or size of the effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big win or clearly indicates that a big win has occurred. For example, by generating a rainbow effect around the movable accessory member 39, it is possible to clearly indicate a big win. The “one-shot notification effect” also includes the effect of generating a rainbow-colored effect around the movable accessory member 39 to clearly indicate that a big win has been won. In other words, the "one-shot announcement effect" is an effect that clearly indicates that the result of the lottery is a big win when the movable accessory member 39 is operated. Also included is a case where a big win confirmation effect is executed by the effect executed by the symbol display part 341 in conjunction with the operation.

Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation receiving period for the touch operation effect together with the effect pattern. First, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 will be described. Note that the touch operation receiving period for the touch operation effect will be mentioned when the touch operation effect determination process in step S2205 described later is described. In addition, in FIG. 27, the operation timing of the movable accessary member 39 defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern means that it is not set in the effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 27, the actuation timing G2 means that the non-reach effect pattern is not set.

As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, six operating timings G1 to G6 are fixedly defined as the timings at which the movable accessory member 39 can operate. It should be noted that the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 does not need to be fixedly defined for all production patterns, and the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 may be individually prescribed for each production pattern type, for example.

The actuation timing G1 is started immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation performance (immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the main symbols) and ends at the beginning of the high-speed fluctuation performance. That is, the operation timing G1 can be set for a non-reach performance pattern, a normal reach performance pattern, a super reach performance pattern, and a special reach performance pattern.

The actuation timing G2 starts immediately after the start of the normal ready-to-win effect and ends at the beginning of the normal ready-to-win effect. That is, the operation timing G2 can be set for the normal ready-to-win effect pattern, the super ready-to-win effect pattern, and the special ready-to-win effect pattern.

The actuation timing G3 starts immediately after the start of the super ready-to-win effect and ends at the beginning of the super ready-to-win effect. The actuation timing G4 is set in the middle stage of the super ready-to-win effect. That is, the actuation timings G3 and G4 can be set for the super ready-to-win effect pattern and the special ready-to-win effect pattern.

The actuation timing G5 is started immediately after the start of the special ready-to-win effect and ends at the beginning of the special ready-to-win effect. The actuation timing G6 is set at the final stage of the special ready-to-win effect. That is, the actuation timings G5 and G6 can be set for the special ready-to-win effect pattern.

In other words, the number of operation timings set for each effect pattern type differs depending on the effect pattern type. Specifically, when the effect pattern is the non-ready effect pattern, the operation timing G1 is set in the beginning immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect. Note that the non-reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which only the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed immediately after the start of the fluctuation is executed.

Further, when the production pattern is the normal ready-to-win production pattern, in addition to the operation timing G1, the operation timing G2 is set in the beginning immediately after the start of the normal ready-to-win production. Note that the normal reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which a normal reach effect that does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect.

Further, when the production pattern is the super ready-to-win production pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 and G2, an operation timing G3 in the early stages immediately after the start of the super ready-to-win production and an operation timing G4 in the middle of the super ready-to-win production are set. ing. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern is a effect pattern in which a super ready-to-win effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal ready-to-win effect are finished.

Further, when the production pattern is the special ready-to-win production pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 to G4, an operation timing G5 at the beginning immediately after the start of the special ready-to-win production and an operation timing G6 at the end of the super ready-to-win production are set. ing. The special ready-to-win effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the special ready-to-win effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect, the normal reach effect and the super ready-to-win effect are finished.

Here, FIGS. 28 to 30 are diagrams showing examples of the movable accessory member actuation timing selection tables A to C. The movable accessory member actuation timing selection table A shown in FIG. A movable accessory member actuation timing selection table B shown in FIG. The movable accessory member actuation timing selection table C shown in FIG. 30 is referred to when determining the actuation timing, and is referred to when determining the actuation timing of the movable accessory member 39 when the effect pattern type is the special ready-to-win effect. be.

In FIGS. 28 to 30, "◎" means that the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a big hit confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and "○" is movable as a chance-up effect (big win expectation indication effect). "X" means that the movable role member 39 is not operated, and "-" means that there is no corresponding actuation timing. In addition, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the case where the production pattern is the non-reach production pattern is omitted, but whether or not to execute the movable accessary member actuation production may be appropriately set.

As shown in FIG. 28, the movable accessary member actuation timing selection table A referred to when the production pattern type is the normal ready-to-win production, for each production pattern type (production patterns X1 to X5) of the normal reach production patterns, Depending on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is operated (whether or not the movable accessory member activation effect is executed) at each of the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39. stipulated.

For example, when the performance pattern type is the performance pattern X1 and the lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing G1, and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the operation timing G2. That is, when the performance pattern X1 is selected when the lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessary member actuation performance is executed as the chance-up performance only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation performance in the normal reach performance pattern.

Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X3 and the lottery result is a loss, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at either the operation timing G1 or the operation timing G2. That is, when the production pattern X3 is selected when the lottery result is out, the movable accessory member operation production is not executed at all in the normal reach production pattern.

As shown in FIG. 29, the movable accessary member actuation timing selection table B referred to when the production pattern type is the super ready-to-win production is for each production pattern type (production patterns Y1 to Y5) of the super ready-to-win production patterns. Second, depending on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G4 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member actuation effect) ) are stipulated.

For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Y1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings. The movable accessory member 39 is not operated in G1, G2, and G4. That is, when the performance pattern Y1 is selected when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessary member actuation performance is executed as the chance-up performance only immediately after the start of the super ready-to-win performance in the super ready-to-win performance pattern.

Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Y3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2 and G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operations are performed. The movable accessory member 39 is not operated at timings G1 and G4. That is, when the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot and the production pattern Y3 is selected, immediately after the start of the normal reach production in the normal reach production pattern and immediately after the start of the super reach production, the movable accessory member operation production is performed as a chance up production. executed.

Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Y5 and the lottery result is a failure, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G1 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings G2 to G4. At G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not activated. That is, when the performance pattern Y5 is selected when the lottery result is a loss, the movable accessary member operation performance is executed as a chance up performance only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern.

As shown in FIG. 30, the movable accessory member actuation timing selection table C referred to when the production pattern type is the special ready-to-win production pattern includes the production pattern types (production patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special ready-to-win production patterns. For each, depending on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member activation effect) or) are stipulated.

For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation timings. The movable accessory member 39 is not operated at G1, G2, G4 to G6. That is, when the performance pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation performance is executed as the chance-up performance only immediately after the start of the super ready-to-win performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern.

Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. The movable accessory member 39 is not operated at timings G1 to G4. That is, when the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot and the production pattern Z3 is selected, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot fixed production (one-shot notification production) immediately after the start of the special reach production in the special reach production pattern and at the end. An action effect is executed.

Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2, G3, and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining The movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the operating timings G1, G4, and G5. That is, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot and the production pattern Z4 is selected, immediately after the start of the normal reach production in the special reach production pattern and immediately after the start of the super, the movable accessory member operation production is executed as a chance up production. Furthermore, at the end of the special reach production, a movable accessory member operation production is executed as a jackpot confirmation production (one-shot notification production).

Then, the MPU 51 selects a movable role at each operation timing based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 and the movable role member actuation timing selection tables A to C selected according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. It determines whether or not the object member 39 is operated (whether or not the movable accessory member operation effect is executed). The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 thus determined is stored in the RAM 512, and based on the operation timing stored in the RAM 512, the movable accessory member operation presentation is executed during execution of the variable game presentation.

<Step S2205>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2205, the MPU 51 executes touch operation effect determination processing. In the touch operation effect determination process, the acceptance period and content of the touch operation effect are determined. Details of the touch operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the touch operation effect may be determined at the stage when it is determined that the touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period and the touch operation effect is to be executed. In this case, the touch operation effect determination process in the command determination process is omitted, and instead of determining the touch operation effect in step S2205, the touch operation acceptance period may be determined.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S1705 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the counter value of the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the combination of the main symbols to be stopped in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type (effect pattern), and the content of the variable game effect including the touch operation effect. 6 to terminate the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2203 and the content of the variation game effect. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image of the main symbol and the effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display and performance display according to the combination of main symbols to be stopped, the variation type, and the variable game performance corresponding to the display variation pattern command, Other production means such as the movable accessory member 39 is made to execute the movable accessory member operation presentation, the voice output presentation and the lamp presentation.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the variations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the big win lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variation game or processing corresponding to the big win game is executed. Here, during the variable display of the main symbols, a game effect specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Touch operation effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect determination process executed in step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. In the touch operation effect determination process, a plurality of touch operations are performed based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the value of the touch operation effect type lottery counter. A touch operation performance when a touch operation is performed during a touch operation reception period is determined for each reception timing.

By the way, in the gaming machine 10 in which the movable accessory member actuation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 during the touch operation acceptance period causes the player to mistakenly think that the touch operation has been performed. can be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (step S2202 in FIG. 23: Yes), the touch operation is performed after the operation timing determination process of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2204 in FIG. 23). Effect determination processing is executed (step S2205 in FIG. 23). Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the reception period for executing the touch operation effect is set by avoiding the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in step S2202 of FIG. It is also conceivable to decide However, if the touch operation reception period is determined by avoiding the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 that is determined in advance, the control processing becomes complicated and the touch operation reception period (execution period of the touch operation effect) is restricted. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is determined without considering the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in advance.

Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect. Specifically, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation reception effect A in which a touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation reception period is in progress is not executed, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation production|presentation B by which operation acceptance production|presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 32(A) (FIGS. 32(A1) to 32(A3)), the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect is not executed is a so-called back button effect. When a predetermined area (a specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is touched during the operation acceptance period, for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the pattern display portion 341 for a certain period of time. be. The touch operation performance A may be a performance suggesting or indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery, or may be a performance of displaying a predetermined image regardless of the lottery result of the big win lottery. Further, the touch operation effect A may be repeatedly executed when there are multiple touch operations during the touch operation acceptance period, or may be executed only for the first touch operation, and the second touch operation may be executed. It may not be executed depending on subsequent touch operations.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(B1), in the touch operation reception effect B, a touch operation reception effect is executed that clearly indicates that the touch operation reception period is in progress. In the present embodiment, as the touch operation reception effect, a touch operation reception image (characters "touch the screen") that clearly indicates that it is a touch operation reception period is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Further, in the touch operation effect B, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 while the touch operation reception image is being displayed (touch operation reception period). , for example, an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time. The touch operation performance B may be a performance suggesting or indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery, or may be a performance of displaying a predetermined image regardless of the lottery result of the big win lottery. It is preferable that the effect suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result of the lottery. Further, the touch operation effect B may be repeatedly executed when there are multiple touch operations during the touch operation acceptance period, or may be executed only for the first touch operation, and the second touch operation may be executed. Although it may not be executed depending on subsequent touch operations, it is preferably executed only for the first touch operation.

When the touch operation effect A or the touch operation effect B is executed as an effect that suggests or indicates the lottery result of the big win lottery (a effect that suggests the degree of expectation for the big win), for example, a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 (panel 25 The type of image that is displayed when a touch operation is performed on the specific area of the player) suggests the degree of expectation, and clearly indicates that it is a big hit. Note that the touch operation effect may be executed as an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the illumination unit 27, and two or more of the pattern display unit 341, the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are combined to perform the touch operation. You may perform a performance. Further, even when the touch operation effect is executed in the voice output effect by the speaker 26 or the lamp effect by the illumination part 27, these effects may be executed as effects suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win.

Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation acceptance period together with the performance pattern as described above, and the touch operation acceptance period will be described with reference to FIG. . As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are fixedly defined. It should be noted that the touch operation acceptance period does not need to be fixedly defined for all production patterns, and the touch operation reception period may be individually defined for each production pattern type, for example.

Further, in FIG. 27, in the effect pattern in which the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2, the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 is not set. For example, in the non-reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the high-speed fluctuation effect, which is the final individual effect, ends in the middle of the first touch operation reception period R1, and the first touch operation reception period R1 is means not set. Similarly, in the normal ready-to-win effect pattern of FIG. 27, the normal ready-to-win effect, which is the final individual effect, is described as ending in the middle of the second touch operation receiving period R2, and the second touch operation receiving period R2 is set. means not. Of course, in FIG. 27, it means that the touch operation acceptance period defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern.

The first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 are periods for receiving a touch operation with respect to the touch operation effect A (see 32(A)). is set to a relatively long time. The first touch operation reception period R1 is a period that continues from immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect to the middle stage of the normal reach effect. The first touch operation receiving period R1 is set for the normal ready-to-win effect pattern (X1 to X3), the super ready-to-win effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special ready-to-win effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). Further, actuation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 are set in the first touch operation receiving period R1. On the other hand, the second touch operation reception period R2 is a period that continues from the first touch operation reception period R1 and continues from the middle stage of the normal ready-to-win effect to the beginning of the super ready-to-win effect. The second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set for the super ready-to-win effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special ready-to-win effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). An actuation timing G3 of the movable accessory member 39 is set in the second touch operation reception period R2. The second touch operation reception period R2 does not need to be continuous with the first touch operation reception period R1, and may be separated from the first touch operation reception period R1.

The third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 are periods for receiving a touch operation for the touch operation effect B (see 32(B)). The third touch operation acceptance period R3 is set in the middle stage of the super ready-to-win effect, and is set for the super ready-to-win effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special ready-to-win effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The third touch operation reception period R3 partially overlaps with the actuation timing G4 of the movable accessory member 39 . Specifically, the third touch operation reception period R3 starts at the actuation timing G4 and ends after a certain period of time after the end of the actuation timing G4. On the other hand, the fourth touch operation receiving period R4 is set immediately after the start of the special ready-to-win effect, and is set for the special ready-to-win effect patterns (Z1 to Z3). The fourth touch operation receiving period R4 overlaps part of the actuation timing G5 of the movable accessory member 39. FIG. Specifically, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 starts at the same time as the actuation timing G5 and ends in the middle of the actuation timing G5.

Here, FIGS. 33 and 34 are diagrams showing an example of the touch operation effect selection table. The touch operation effect selection table is for selecting a touch operation effect to be executed when a touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period, and is referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. 31 . Note that FIGS. 33 and 34 also show the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big prize lottery will result in a big win (big win expectation degree) with respect to the touch operation effect.

FIG. 33(A) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during a first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing a touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32(A)). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production|presentation selection table A1 for determining production|presentation. In the touch operation effect selection table A, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is "touch "Operation effect A1-1" to "Touch operation effect A1-4" and "No touch operation effect" are set.

“Touch operation production A1-1” has a “very low” jackpot expectation, “touch operation production A1-2” has a “low” jackpot expectation, and “touch operation production A1-3” has a jackpot expectation. The degree is “medium”, and the “touch operation effect A1-4” has a “high” degree of expectation for a big win. With "no touch operation effect", no touch operation effect is executed even if a touch operation is performed during the first touch operation reception period R1. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is selected as a lottery result. choose accordingly.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a loss, and the production patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern types, the counter value of the first touch operation production type counter If is 0 to 19, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the degree of expectation for the big hit is "extremely low" Touch operation effect A1- 1 is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 39, the touch operation effect A1-2 with the "low" big win expectation is determined.

In addition, when the lottery result is 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot and production patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 are selected as production pattern types, the counter value of the first touch operation production type counter is If it is 0 to 19, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the touch operation effect A1-1 that the degree of expectation for big win is "very low". is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 37, the touch operation effect A1-2 with a "low" jackpot expectation is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 38, the touch operation performance A1-3 with a "medium" jackpot expectation is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation performance type counter is 39, the touch operation with a "high" jackpot expectation. Effect A1-4 is determined.

In other words, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, regardless of the lottery result, basically no touch operation or a touch operation performance with a low expectation of a big win is determined, which is "extremely low" or "low". When the result of the lottery is a probability variable jackpot, a touch operation presentation with a ``middle'' or ``high'' jackpot expectation is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed during the first touch operation acceptance period R1 of the high-speed fluctuation effect, the touch operation as the back button effect is excluded except for the case where the lottery result is selected with a low probability of a big win. As an effect, it is difficult to execute a touch operation effect with a high expectation for a big win. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation during the first touch operation reception period R1 in the high-speed fluctuation effect.

FIG. 33(B) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32(A)). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production|presentation selection table A2 for determining production|presentation. In the touch operation effect selection table A2, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is "touch "Operation effect A2-1" to "Touch operation effect A2-4" and "No touch operation effect" are set.

“Touch operation production A2-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation, “Touch operation production A2-2” has a “medium” jackpot expectation, and “Touch operation production A3-3” has a jackpot expectation. is "high", and "touch operation effect A2-4" is "big win confirmed". With "no touch operation effect", no touch operation effect is executed even if a touch operation is performed during the second touch operation reception period R2. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is selected as a lottery result. choose accordingly.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a loss, and the production patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern type, the counter value of the second touch operation production type counter is 0 to 29. If so, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 49, the touch operation effect A2-1 with a “low” jackpot expectation is determined, If the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 50 to 59, the touch operation effect A2-2 with the "medium" big win expectation is determined.

In addition, when the lottery result is 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot, and production patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as production pattern types, the counter value of the second touch operation production type counter is 0 to 19. If there is, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect A2-1 with the “low” jackpot expectation is determined, and the second touch operation effect is determined. If the counter value of the 2-touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 54, the touch operation effect A2-2 with a "medium" jackpot expectation is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 55-57. If there is, a touch operation effect A2-3 with a "high" big win expectation is determined, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 58, 59, a touch operation effect A2-4 with a "big win confirmed". is determined.

That is, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, regardless of the lottery result, there is basically no touch operation, or a touch operation effect with a relatively low big win expectation, that is, "low" or "medium" big win expectation. When it is determined and the lottery result is a variable probability big win, a touch operation presentation of 'high' or 'big win confirmed' as the expectation of big win is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed during the second touch operation acceptance period R2 of the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect, the back button effect is excluded except for the case where the lottery result is a big win and the selection is made with a low probability. As a touch operation effect, it is difficult to execute a touch operation effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win, including confirmation of a big win. Therefore, even in the second touch operation accepting period R2 of the normal ready-to-win performance and the super ready-to-win performance, it is difficult to discriminate the lottery result by the touch operation except when the touch operation performance of confirming the big win is executed.

FIG. 34(A) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed in a third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing a touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32(B)). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production|presentation selection table B1 for determining production|presentation. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, "touch "Operation effect B1-1" to "Touch operation effect B1-5" are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, "no touch operation effect" is not set. Any one of the touch operation effects of the operation effects B1-5" is executed.

“Touch operation production B1-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation, “Touch operation production B1-2” has a “medium” jackpot expectation, and “Touch operation production B1-3” has a jackpot expectation. is “high”, “touch operation effect B1-4” has a “very high” big win expectation level, and “touch operation effect B1-5” is “big win confirmed”. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is selected as a lottery result. choose accordingly.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a loss, and the production patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern type, the counter value of the third touch operation production type counter is 0 to 39. If so, a touch operation effect B1-1 with a "low" jackpot expectation is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, a touch operation with a "medium" jackpot expectation The effect B1-2 is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 70 to 79, the touch operation effect B1-3 with a "high" big win expectation is determined.

In addition, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, when production patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as production pattern types, the counter value of the third touch operation production type counter is 0 to 19. If there is, a touch operation effect B1-1 with a "low" jackpot expectation is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, a touch operation effect with a "medium" jackpot expectation B1-2 is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect B1-3 with a "high" jackpot expectation degree is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter is determined. If the counter value of is 70 to 77, the touch operation effect B1-4 with a high expectation of the big win is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 78, 79, the "jackpot confirmed. ” is determined.

That is, during the third touch operation reception period R3, it is relatively easy to select a touch operation effect with a "high" or higher jackpot expectation, and particularly when the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the "high" jackpot expectation. The above touch operation effects are likely to be selected. In other words, when the touch operation is performed during the third touch operation receiving period R3 of the super ready-to-win effect, the touch operation effect with the expectation of the big win of "high" or more is relatively easily executed, and the lottery result is particularly changed. In the case of a big win, a touch operation effect with a "high" or higher level of expectation for a big win is likely to be executed. Therefore, in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super ready-to-win performance, it becomes easier to predict the lottery result by the touch operation than in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 for the touch operation performance A.例文帳に追加

FIG. 34(B) shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed during a fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing a touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32(B)). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation production|presentation selection table B2 for determining production|presentation. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, "touch "Operation effect B2-1" to "Touch operation effect B2-5" are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, "no touch operation effect" is not set. Any touch operation effect of the operation effect B2-5" is executed.

“Touch operation production B2-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation, “Touch operation production B2-2” has a “medium” jackpot expectation, and “Touch operation production B2-3” has a jackpot expectation. is “high”, “touch operation effect B2-4” has a “very high” expectation for big win, and “touch operation effect B2-5” is “big win confirmed”. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is selected as a lottery result. choose accordingly.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a loss, and if the production patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern type, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation production type counter is 0 to 59, it will be a big hit. A touch operation effect B2-1 with a "low" expectation is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 89, a touch operation effect B2-2 with a "medium" big win expectation. is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 90 to 99, the touch operation effect B1-3 with a "high" big win expectation is determined.

Also, when the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, when the production patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern type, a big win is expected if the counter value of the fourth touch operation production type counter is 0 to 19. A touch operation effect B2-1 with a degree of "low" is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 59, a touch operation effect B2-2 with a "medium" jackpot expectation degree is determined. If it is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 84, the touch operation effect B2-3 with a "high" jackpot expectation is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is determined. If it is 85 to 94, the touch operation effect B2-4 that the degree of expectation for the big win is "extremely high" is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 95 to 99, the touch that is "big win confirmed". An operation effect B2-5 is determined.

In other words, during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, touch operation effects with a "high" or higher jackpot expectation are likely to be selected, and particularly when the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the jackpot expectation is "high" or higher. The touch operation presentation is likely to be selected. In other words, when a touch operation is performed during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 of the special ready-to-win effect, a touch operation effect with a "high" or higher expectation of a big win is likely to be executed, and the result of the lottery is a variable probability big win. In this case, a touch operation effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win is "high" or higher is likely to be executed. Therefore, during the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, the lottery result is most easily predicted by the touch operation among all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4.

<Step S2301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, at step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined at step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a non-reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the touch operation effect. Of course, the touch operation effect may be executed when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. That is, when the production pattern is not a non-ready-to-win production pattern, the MPU 51 can determine that the production pattern is one of the normal ready-to-win production pattern, the super ready-to-win production pattern, and the special ready-to-win production pattern, and that the first touch operation reception period R1 exists. Therefore, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation accepting period R1 is determined.

Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the touch operation effect selection table A1 (see FIG. 33(A)), the touch operation effect corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. to decide. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1. If it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed during the first touch operation reception period R1, the display variation pattern command includes "no touch operation effect" as the touch operation effect type. , or information related to the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 may not be included.

<Step S2303>
At step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined at step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is the normal ready-to-win effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the production pattern is the normal ready-to-win production pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation production for the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4, and the first touch operation reception period R1. Determines only the touch operation effect for . On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2304.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
If the effect pattern is neither the non-reach effect pattern nor the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 performs the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. It determines (step S2304), and further determines the touch operation effect in the third touch operation receiving period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (step S2305). That is, when the production pattern is neither the non-reach production pattern nor the normal reach production pattern, the MPU 51 determines that the production pattern is either the super ready-to-reach production pattern or the special ready-to-reach production pattern, and the second touch operation receiving period R2 and the third touch. Since it can be determined that the operation reception period R3 exists, the touch operation presentation during the second touch operation reception period R2 and the touch operation presentation during the third touch operation reception period R3 are determined.

Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table A2 (see FIG. 33B), the MPU 51 selects the second A touch operation presentation for the touch operation acceptance period R2 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information to the effect that it is a touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2. If it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed during the second touch operation reception period R2, the display variation pattern command includes "no touch operation effect" as the touch operation effect type. , or information regarding the touch operation effect for the second touch operation acceptance period R2 may not be included.

Further, the MPU 51 accepts the third touch operation according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter based on the touch operation effect selection table B1 (see FIG. 34A). A touch operation effect for the period R3 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3.

<Step S2306>
At step S2306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined at step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is the super ready-to-win effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the super ready-to-win effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the production pattern is the super ready-to-win production pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation production for the fourth touch operation reception period R4, and the first to third touch operation reception periods R1 to A touch operation acceptance effect for R3 is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the super ready-to-win effect pattern (step S2306: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
If the effect pattern is neither the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, nor the super reach effect pattern (step S2307: No), the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect B during the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). ) determines the touch operation effect (step S2307). That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is the special ready-to-win effect pattern and the fourth touch operation receiving period R4 exists when the effect pattern is neither the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, nor the super ready-to-win effect pattern. , determine the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table B2 (see FIG. 34(B)), the MPU 51 selects the fourth A touch operation effect for the touch operation acceptance period R4 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

Note that the touch operation effect type for the first to fourth touch operation reception period R4 may be set in the RAM 512 as a command different from the display variation pattern command.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the variable game production process (step S1707), in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the movable accessory member 39 determined when the variable pattern command is received in the command determination process The movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing (step S2204 in FIG. 23), and the touch operation effect (step S2205 in FIG. , the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game effect process executed at step S1707 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 51 confirms the counter value of the variation counter (step S2401) and determines whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is 0 (step S2402). Here, when the counter value of the variation counter is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 can determine that it is not in the process of pattern variation, so it terminates the variation game control process, and the counter value of the variation counter is not 0. (Step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 executes movable accessory member actuation processing. In the movable accessory member actuation process, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Member 39 is actuated. The details of the movable accessory member actuation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 executes touch operation effect execution processing. In the touch operation effect execution process, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341 during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27). In addition, the touch operation effect is executed except when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Details of the touch operation effect execution processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. In the movable accessory member actuation process, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (first position) to the actuation position at the actuation timing determined in the movable accessory member actuation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). (second position) and from the operating position to the standby position.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 (FIG. 27 to FIG. 30) is reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2502, and if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No). , the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S2502). Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable role product member operating flag to ON (step S2503), and ends the movable role product member operating process.

<Step S2504>
If it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). That is, the MPU 51 determines the end point of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). It is determined whether the value corresponding to is reached. Here, if it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505, and if it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the process to step S2506.

<Step S2505>
When it is time to return the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 (step S2505), the movable accessory member activation process is terminated. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S2506 and S2507>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( step S2506). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to OFF (step S2507), and executes the movable accessory member operation processing. finish. In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 has not returned to the standby position (step S2506: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation processing.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 37, whether or not a touch operation is detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the first to third touch operation pattern flags (predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 (on the panel 25) Determine whether an object exists in the specific area). Specifically, when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. If it is determined that the operation state corresponds to touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", the touch operation state corresponds to touch operation continuation. (See FIG. 22(B)). It should be noted that the fact that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 in step S2601 does not refer to whether or not the player actually performs a touch operation, but to all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It means that the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, it is determined that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and the detection of the object by the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation. There is

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not determined that it has been detected (step S2601: No), the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operating process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), is any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27) On the condition that a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) is sent to the display control device 6. (Steps S2603 to S2610 to be described later) to execute a touch operation presentation.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes). That is, in this embodiment, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, even if the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to Even if it is R4, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored by terminating the touch operation effect execution process when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON.

Here, the movable accessory member in operation flag is turned on at the stage when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached and the operation start signal for operating the movable accessory member 39 is output to the motor driver 39c. Since it is set (steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member 39 is not operating and is in the standby position when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to OFF at the stage when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S2506 and S2507 in FIG. 36), so the movable accessory member in operation flag The movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position at the stage when the mode is set to OFF. That is, from the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the movable accessory member 39 The movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON until the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position after the return is confirmed, and the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored. Therefore, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is a touch operation by the player or is based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, so that even the first to fourth touches Even during the operation accepting periods R1 to R4, the touch operation effect is not executed.

<Steps S2603 and S2604>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation accepting period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation production for the first touch operation reception period R1. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation accepting period R1 is executed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: No), the process proceeds to step S2605.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the second touch operation production for the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2606), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is executed in the pattern display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, when it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2605: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2607.

<Steps S2607 and S2608>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the third touch operation production for the third touch operation reception period R3. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2608), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is executed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S2607: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2609.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
In step S2609, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation accepting period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fourth touch operation production for the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2610), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, a touch operation effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. On the other hand, if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: No), the MPU 51 can determine that none of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 applies, and therefore executes the touch operation presentation. Without doing so, the touch operation effect execution processing ends.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the jackpot game effect processing (step S1708), in the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect and ending effect) is executed by the pattern display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

By the way, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the conventional game machine includes a movable accessory member actuation effect for actuating a movable accessory member and a pattern display section within a touch operation acceptance period as a variable game effect. In some cases, a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the . In this type of game machine, a touch operation effect may be executed unexpectedly assuming that a touch operation has been performed due to the actuation of the movable accessory member during the touch operation acceptance period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and thus the touch operation effect may be executed.

In addition, during the touch operation reception period, there are cases where a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is a touch operation reception period is executed, and there are cases where it is not executed. The touch operation effect when the operation is performed generally does not have a high degree of expectation for a big win. On the other hand, the movable accessary member actuation effect is often executed as a chance-up effect or a big hit confirmation effect. Therefore, the expectation for the big win is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member, or in a state where the big win is clearly indicated, the touch operation performance with the low expectation for the big win is executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member. It can also be a cause of a decrease in interest.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the movable accessory member From the stage where the movable accessory member is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started) to the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position after the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed. By ignoring the detection results of the detection sensors 38a to 38d, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Therefore, even if the movable accessory member 39 starts to operate after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the execution of the touch operation effect can be restricted, and of course the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect until the return to . As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the touch operation effect is executed. can be prevented. Therefore, the expectation for the big win is heightened by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect with the low expectation for the big win is not executed in a state where the big win is clearly indicated, so that it is not interesting. Decrease can be suppressed.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, the movable accessory member 39 is turned on. From the stage when it is decided to operate (the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory is released. Until the stage where the member 39 is at the standby position, the case where the detection results of the object by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON, that is, the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member is started) , until the return of the movable accessory member is confirmed, the processing for determining whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors is not executed. .

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 38, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above, whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. It is determined first (step S2701), and on the condition that the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), the second determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is detected (step S2702). Then, when it is determined that a touch operation has been detected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51, as in the first embodiment, If there is (Yes in any of steps S2603, S2605, S2607, and S2609), set a touch operation effect execution command in the corresponding touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 and transmit it to the display control device 6 (steps S2604, S2606, S2608 or S2610).

Thus, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (operation of the movable accessory member 39 starts ) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed (step S2701: Yes), regardless of whether the touch operation is performed by the player or the movable accessory member 39 is activated. , the process (step S2702) of determining whether or not an object exists in front of the predetermined area of the pattern display portion 341 is not executed. As a result, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the execution of the touch operation presentation due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is the touch operation performed by the player is prevented. can be prevented. As a result, the expectation for the big win is heightened by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect with the low expectation for the big win is not executed in a state where the big win is clearly indicated. can prevent a decrease in

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON (the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started) (immediately before the return of the movable accessory member 39) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed with the operation of the movable accessory member, the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect (when the touch operation is detected by the detection sensor) This is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted depending on the situation determined to have occurred. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect is during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, an effect (specific effect) different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect, which is also different from the above-described first embodiment. is different. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the big win lottery, or may be an effect irrelevant to the result of the big win lottery.

39 and 40, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of this embodiment. FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40(B) is set by the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40(A). It is a figure which shows the expectation degree (jackpot expectation degree) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery with respect to specific production will be a jackpot.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect or a specific effect in the pattern display section 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811 which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set so that the transmitted flag is set to ON when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811 described later, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S2801, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect and the specific effect from being repeatedly started. However, if it is determined that the touch operation is detected after the end of the touch operation effect or the specific effect (if it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341), the touch operation acceptance period On the condition that there is one, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed again.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6 (Step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2802.

<Step S2802>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 determines the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. (B)), it is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2803, and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not determined that it has been detected (step S2802: No), the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 is determined, for example, based on the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. In the following, when determining whether or not the second touch operation reception period R2 to the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the value of the variation counter and step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined based on the determined variation type (effect pattern).

Here, if it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2811, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the process proceeds to Move to S2804.

<Step S2804>
If it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S2804). Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2805, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: No), the process proceeds to step S2805. Move to S2806.

<Step S2805>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the super ready-to-win effect is being executed (step S2805). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is the acceptance period when the normal reach effect is being executed or the acceptance period when the super reach effect is being executed. Whether or not the super ready-to-win effect is being executed is determined, for example, based on the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the MPU 51 is executing the super reach effect (step S2805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2807, and if the super reach effect is not being executed (step S2805: No), the process proceeds to step S2811. Transition.

<Step S2806>
If it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806). Here, if the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation accepting period R3 or the fourth touch operation accepting period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2807, and touch operation accepting period R3 or the fourth touch If it is not the operation reception period R4 (step S2807: No), the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated.

<Step S2807>
If it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 during execution of the super reach effect (step S2807: Yes), or if it is either the third touch operation accepting period R3 or the fourth touch operation accepting period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operating process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2808, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S2807: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2808>
When the flag during operation of the movable accessory member is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 makes a one-shot announcement that the operation of the movable accessory member 39 indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not an effect is executed (step S2808). Here, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2808: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2809, and the one-shot notification effect is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. is not executed (step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2809>
When the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 executes specific effect determination processing (step S2810). That is, the MPU 51 performs the touch operation effect determination process (in the command determination process of FIG. 23 In order to execute the specific effect instead of executing the touch operation effect determined in step S2205), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is determined in the specific effect determination process of step S2809. The specific performance may be a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big win expectation), or may be a performance unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the big win. is executed as

Here, FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process executed in step S2809 in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of a specific effect set in the specific effect determination table of 40(A).

As shown in FIG. 40(A), in the specific effect determination table, according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss), a specific effect corresponding to the counter value of the specific effect pattern type counter "Specific effect A1" to "Specific effect A3", "Fixed effect A", "Fixed effect B", and "Premium effect" are defined as effect pattern types. As shown in FIG. 40(B), the “specific effect A1” is a effect with a “medium” jackpot expectation, and the “specific effect A2” is a “high” jackpot expectation. Performance A3” is a performance with a “very high” degree of expectation for a big win.

“Fixed effect A” is an image effect of “big win confirmed” executed in the symbol display section 341 . The image effect as the fixed effect A is, for example, an effect that is executed at a position that is invisible or difficult to see when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position. In this case, the fixed effect A can be visually recognized by returning the movable accessory member to the standby position. Therefore, by including the fixed effect A as the specific effect, not only is it possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is activated, but also to the player, after the movable accessory member 39 returns, the fixed effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not it is executed. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the performance even after the performance of the movable accessory member is finished, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The "confirmation effect B" is an effect other than the image effect of "confirmation of the jackpot". A lamp effect for lighting the illumination part 27 and a movable accessory member actuation effect for activating the movable accessory member 39 are conceivable. In step S2802, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the movable accessory member 39 is immediately operated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned to the standby position. can be considered. In this case, the fixed production B is executed as the second movable accessory member actuation production of the movable accessory member actuation productions that are continuously executed, so the fixed production B is executed as an unexpected production. Also, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is operated again after the movable accessory member 39 returns. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the performance even after the performance of the movable accessory member is finished, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The “premium production” is a production of “probability variable jackpot confirmation”. The "premium effect" is a effect with an extremely low selection rate compared to other effects, and in this embodiment, it is selected only when the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, and the selection rate is 1%. For example, as the “premium effect”, an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the pattern display section 341 can be considered.

Returning to the description of FIG. 40(A), when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effects A and the fixed effects B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. However, the premium effect is not selected. Further, when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B can be selected, but the selection rate is low.

When the lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot, one of the specific performances A1 to A3, the fixed performance A and the fixed performance B is selected according to the counter value of the specific performance type counter, but the premium performance is selected. no. Further, when the lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect are more likely to be selected than the 5R normal jackpot.

When the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, one of specific effects A1 to A3, fixed effects A, fixed effects B and premium effects is selected according to the counter value of the specific effects type counter. In addition, when the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the performance including the premium performance in which the jackpot is fixed is more likely to be selected than the 5R normal jackpot, but the selection rate is the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the probability of the premium performance is low. is selected.

When the lottery result is a loss, one of the specific effects A1 to A3 is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and the fixed effects A, fixed effects B and premium effects are not selected. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, the specific performance A with a "medium" jackpot expectation is likely to be selected, and the specific performance B with a "high" jackpot expectation and the specific performance C with a "very high" jackpot expectation. Selectivity is low.

<Step S2810>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, at step S2810, the MPU 51 sets a specific effect execution command for causing the symbol display section 341 to execute the specific effect determined at step S2809, and transmits the command to the display control device 6. As a result, the specific effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 .

<Step S2811>
In step S2811, when the MPU 51 determines that a touch operation has been detected (when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display portion 341), the touch operation effect determination process (Fig. 23 command determination processing step S2205) is determined in the touch operation effect execution command to the pattern display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, the display control device 6 determines that the touch operation has been detected (based on the detection of the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341) (step S2802: Yes ), causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect.

Specifically, the display control device 6 causes the MPU 51 to detect an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 during the first touch operation reception period R1 or during the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of the normal reach effect. A predetermined touch operation performance is executed when it is determined whether or not it exists. That is, in the normal reach effect, the touch operation effect is executed, and the specific effect is not executed. Further, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, a touch operation effect determined in advance is always executed.

On the other hand, on condition that the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the display control device 6 performs the second touch operation reception period R2 and the third touch operation during execution of the super reach effect by the MPU 51. When it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation start during the reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect determined in advance. That is, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the specific effect is executed and the touch operation effect is not executed. In other words, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation is performed during the period of accepting the touch operation that can cause the touch operation to be executed. Execution of performance is restricted. Also, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed, the specific effect is always executed instead of the touch operation reception effect.

As described above, in the conventional game machine in which the movable accessory member actuation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, A touch operation effect may be executed. Here, the movable accessory member actuation effect may be executed as a one-shot announcement effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot is won. In particular, in the super reach production and the special reach production, it is often executed as a jackpot confirmation production compared to the normal reach production. On the other hand, touch operation effects often include effects in which it is almost impossible to expect that the result of the lottery will be a big win. Therefore, when it is erroneously detected that the player has touched a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member causes a one-shot notification. In spite of the fact that the effect is being performed, if the effect is executed immediately after which it is almost impossible to expect a big win, there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will suddenly decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super ready-to-win effect or the special ready-to-win effect, a big win can hardly be expected. A specific performance is executed in place of a touch operation performance which may be executed as a performance. Here, as shown in FIGS. 40(A) and 40(B), the specific effect is almost always a big win because even the specific effect A1, which has the lowest degree of expectation for a big win, has a "medium" degree of expectation for a big win. Unexpected performances are not included. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the execution of an effect in which a big hit can hardly be expected immediately after the one-shot notification effect is performed in the super ready-to-win effect or the special ready-to-win effect.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is confirmed. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the presence or absence of the touch operation is not confirmed, so the touch operation effect is not executed. That is, in both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. . However, since it is difficult to execute a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the early stage of the performance pattern, for example, in the normal reach performance, there is little need to limit the execution of the touch operation performance in the high speed fluctuation performance, the normal reach performance, or the like. In particular, there is little need to limit the execution of the touch operation effect due to the touch operation during the first touch operation acceptance period R1.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect. Further, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted during the first touch operation acceptance period R1. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect may or may not be restricted depending on the timing of actuation of the movable accessory member 39 . As a result, through the entire effect from the start of the variable display of the main symbols until the stop of the variable display, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted at the timing when the interest in the game tends to decrease, and at other timings. Since the touch operation effect is executed as planned, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from becoming meaningless.

In the present embodiment, in the special reach production pattern, the execution of the touch operation production is restricted in both the super reach production and the special reach production, but in the special reach production pattern, the touch operation production is performed only in the special reach production. may be restricted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a touch operation, the touch operation effect or specific effect is immediately executed. A touch operation effect or a specific effect may be executed. for example. When it is determined that there is a touch operation due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed after the movable accessory member 39 returns.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the game machine 10 has one movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results of the four detection sensors 38a to 38d is ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine has two movable accessory members, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted while one of the movable accessory members is in operation, and the touch operation is performed while the other movable accessory member is in operation. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the execution of effects is not restricted. This embodiment also differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed using two detection sensors.

41 to 49, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 41 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a main movable role member 39A, a sub movable role member 39B, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, a first A sub-detection sensor 38C and a second sub-detection sensor 38D are provided.

The main movable accessory member 39A is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and is located at a predetermined first standby position above the symbol display section 341. (see FIG. 4) and the second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position, along the surface of the pattern display portion 341 by the driving force from the first motor 39a1. It can move up and down. The first motor 39 a 1 is controlled by the motor driver 39 c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51 . In this embodiment, the main movable accessory member 39A can be operated at operating timings G2, G4, and G6 among operating timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. Also, the front side coverage of the symbol display portion 341 when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the first operating position is the same as that of the symbol display portion 341 when the sub movable accessory member 39B is in the second operating position. Higher than the coverage on the front side. Further, the operating frequency of the main movable accessory member 39A is higher than the operating frequency of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

The sub movable accessory member 39B, in the left region of the pattern display portion 341, between the second standby position and the second operating position from the center of the pattern display portion 341 on the right side of the second standby position, the second motor It can be moved in the horizontal direction along the surface of the pattern display portion 341 by the driving force from 39a2. The second motor 39 a 2 is controlled by the motor driver 39 c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51 . In this embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B can be operated at operating timings G1, G3, and G5 among operating timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG.

This sub-movable accessory member 39B has a display section 391B configured by a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. In other words, the sub-movable accessory member 39 also functions as a sub-display. In the display section 391B, for example, an effect linked to the variable game effect executed in the symbol display section 341 is executed. Further, the touch operation reception effect and the touch operation effect are executed on the display unit 391B. The display contents on the display section 391B are controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51 and the like.

Of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 27, the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3 are the touch operations on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. The second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 are periods during which the display unit 391B receives the touch operation for executing the effect. This is the period during which the pattern display section 341 accepts. Also, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect is executed to clearly indicate that it is the touch operation reception period.

The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, and are optical sensors such as diffuse reflection sensors. The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the existence of an object, for example, based on changes in the amount of reflected light received. The first main detection sensor 38A is arranged in the upper part of the right side of the pattern display part 341, and the second main detection sensor 38B is arranged in the left part of the central part of the pattern display part 341, respectively. The range that can detect existence is different.

Here, FIG. 43 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the main detection sensors 38A and 38D with respect to the symbol display section 341 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 43(A) shows the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (the cross-hatched portion in the drawing), and FIG. 43(B) shows the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B ( FIG. 43(C) shows the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (the cross hatched portion in the drawing). part).

As shown in FIG. 43(A), the first main detection sensor 38A detects the presence of an object in an area excluding the lower and upper right portions of the pattern display portion 341, based on changes in the amount of reflected light received. .

As shown in FIG. 43(B), the second main detection sensor 38B detects the change in the amount of reflected light received by detecting the left portion (operation area of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) and the right portion of the pattern display portion 341. Detect the presence of an object in the area except the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 43(C), the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42(A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42(B)) is , the left part of the pattern display part 341 (the operation area of the sub-movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part and the lower right part. In this overlapping area, the left part (the operation area of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) and the lower part of the pattern display part 341 are not within the detection range, so that the touch operation is mistakenly performed by the player with the game ball that has passed through the warp, for example. Being detected can be prevented. In addition, in the overlapping area, the left part of the pattern display part 341 (the operation area of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) is not within the detection range, so that, for example, the touch operation on the front side of the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is performed. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation on the front side of the pattern display section 341 has been performed when the symbol display portion 341 is touched. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) overlap. By detecting the presence, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . In other words, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 detects a touch on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341. Determine that the operation has been performed.

Of course, it may be determined that an object exists on the front side of the pattern display section 341 when an object is detected by one of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Also, the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B may be arranged not only in the periphery of the pattern display portion 341 but also in the periphery of the pattern display portion 341. FIG. Furthermore, the number of main detection sensors need only be one or more, and the number of main detection sensors is not limited to two and may be any other number.

The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is a formula sensor. The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object, for example, based on changes in the amount of reflected light received. The first sub-detection sensor 38C is arranged in the upper center of the display section 391B, and the second sub-detection sensor 38D is arranged in the lower center of the display section 391B, and the detection range of the presence of an object differs.

Here, FIG. 44 is a front view schematically showing the detection ranges of the first and second sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D with respect to the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, FIG. 44(A) shows the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C (the cross-hatched portion in the drawing), and FIG. 44(B) shows the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D ( FIG. 44(C) shows the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D (the cross-hatched portion in the drawing). part).

As shown in FIG. 44(A), the first sub-detection sensor 38C removes the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in an area.

As shown in FIG. 44(B), the second sub-detection sensor 38D removes the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in an area.

As shown in FIG. 44(C), the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C (see FIG. 44(A)) and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D (see FIG. 44(B)) is , excluding the four corners of the display portion 391B. That is, the main detection sensors 38A, 38B and the sub-detection sensors 38C, 38D are set to have different detection ranges.

By the way, each of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D may detect an object other than the front side of the display section 391B (left or right side of the display section 391B). For example, the game ball passing through the warp and passing the left side of the display section 391B, the main movable accessory member 39A moving on the right side of the display section 391B, and the movement of the player on the front side of the symbol display section 341 are detected. may be On the other hand, whether or not the touch operation on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been performed on the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D. If the detection range is set to determine whether the touch operation is performed by an object existing around the display unit 391B, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that the touch operation has been performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D is touched on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is the detection range for judging whether or not That is, the MPU 51 determines that a touch operation has been performed on the front side of the display section 341 when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D. Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D, it may be determined that there is an object on the front side of the display section 391B. Also, the number of sub-detection sensors need only be one or more, and the number of sub-detection sensors is not limited to two and may be any other number.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes two movable accessory members 39A and 39B and two display portions 341 and 391B, and a detection sensor 38A for detecting touch operations on the respective display portions 341 and 391B. -38D. That is, in this embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D having different detection ranges are provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, while preventing erroneous detection due to the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the main movable touch operation effect based on the touch operation on the front side of the sub movable accessory member 39B different from the pattern display part 341 is performed. It is possible to cause the display section 391B of the accessory member 39A to execute. As a result, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is operating, it is possible to accept the touch operation and execute the touch operation effect. In this embodiment, mainly the touch operation detection process, the movable accessary member actuation process, the touch operation effect execution process, and the like are different from those in the first embodiment. The above-described processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG.

[Touch operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 (panel 25 A touch operation state on a specific area in the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is executed (steps S2901 to S2908). As a result, in the game machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the symbol display section is displayed at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. It is determined whether or not the player has performed a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of 341 (a specific area on the panel 25).

Further, in the touch operation detection process of this embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, based on the detection results of the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D, the sub movable accessory member 39B with respect to the front side of the display section 391B A touch operation state is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories on the front side of the display unit 391B is executed (steps S2909 to S2916). As a result, in the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the display unit 391B is displayed at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. Whether or not there is a touch operation by the player on the front side of the is determined.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 45, in steps S2901 and S2902, the MPU 51 performs processing to shift the touch operation histories two and one before in the touch operation histories with respect to the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341. do. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second main touch operation detection flag to the first main touch operation detection flag (step S2901), and changes the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag to the second main touch operation detection flag. The operation detection flag is shifted (overwritten) (step S2902).

<Steps S2903 and S2904>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the first main detection sensor 38A has detected the presence of the touch operation object, and if the first main detection sensor 38A has detected the presence of the object (step S2903: Yes ), the first main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2904), and the process proceeds to step S2905. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2905 without setting the first main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2905 and S2906>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second main detection sensor 38B has detected the presence of an object. If the second main detection sensor 38B has detected the presence of an object (step S2905: Yes) The second main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2906), and the process proceeds to step S2907. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2907 without setting the second main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 sets the most recent touch operation state to the third main touch operation detection flag based on the first main sensor detection flag and the second main sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third main touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 determines that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, and performs the third detection. Set the main touch operation detection flag to on. On the other hand, when at least one of the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 detects that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341. It determines not to, and sets the third main touch operation detection flag to OFF. Further, when the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and causes the process to proceed to step S2909.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In steps S2909 and S2910, the MPU 51 performs a process of shifting the touch operation history two and one before in the touch operation history on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second sub-touch operation detection flag to the first sub-touch operation detection flag (step S2909), and shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag to the second sub-touch operation detection flag. It is shifted (overwritten) (step S2910).

<Steps S2911 and S2912>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C. The first sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2912), and the process proceeds to step S2913. On the other hand, when the existence of the object is not detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C (step S2911: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2913 without setting the first sub-detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2913 and S2914>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the second sub-detection sensor 38D. The second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2914), and the process proceeds to step S2915. On the other hand, when the existence of the object is not detected by the second sub-detection sensor 38D (step S2913: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2915 without setting the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2915 and S2916>
In step S2915, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third sub-touch operation detection flag based on the first sub-sensor detection flag and the second sub-sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D, the MPU 51 determines that the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Then, the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 determines that there is no object in the predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B. and sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to OFF. Further, when the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection process.

As described above, in the touch operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2908, the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is the most recent three touch operation states at 1 msec intervals. are stored in the RAM 512 as the first to third main touch operation detection flags. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third main touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second main touch operation detection flag, and two main touch operation detection flags are stored. The previous operating state is memorized. Then, based on the main touch operation history for a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, which consists of the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag, a touch on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is performed. A manipulation detection pattern is determined.

Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between main touch operation detection patterns and main touch operation states.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the main touch operation history is "on", "on", and "on", the MPU 51 continues the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341. The first main touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

Further, when the main touch operation history is "OFF", "ON", or "ON", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is started, and the first main touch is performed. The operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "ON", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF".

Further, when the main touch operation history is "ON", "OFF", or "OFF", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is completed, and the first main touch operation is performed. The operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second main touch operation pattern flag to "OFF", and the third main touch operation pattern flag to "ON".

Further, when the main touch operation history does not indicate the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, or the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 has not been touched. Then, the first main touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF".

Further, in the touch operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2916, the touch operation state for the latest three times at 1 msec intervals as a sub-touch operation history on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. The first to third sub-touch operation detection flags are stored in the RAM 512 . Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as a third sub-touch operation detection flag, the touch operation state immediately before is stored as a second sub-touch operation detection flag, and the operation two operations before is stored as a first sub-touch operation detection flag. state is stored. Then, based on the main touch operation history on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B consisting of the first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag, the touch operation detection pattern on the front side of the display portion 391B is determined.

Here, FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of a sub-touch operation data table showing the relationship between sub-touch operation detection patterns and sub-touch operation states.

As shown in FIG. 46B, when the sub-touch operation history is "on", "on", and "on", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is It is determined that the sub-touch operation pattern is continued, and the first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

In addition, when the sub-touch operation history is "OFF", "ON", or "ON", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has started, and the first The sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "ON", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF".

In addition, when the sub-touch operation history is "on", "off", or "off", the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has ended, and the first The sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "ON".

Further, when the sub-touch operation history is neither continuation of touch operation, start of touch operation, or end of touch operation, MPU 51 determines that touch operation on the front side of display unit 391B of sub-movable accessory member 39B is not performed. Then, the first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF".

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

In the movable accessory member activation processing of this embodiment, the processing of activating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the processing of activating the movable accessory member 39 of the first embodiment ( steps S3001 to S3007). Further, in the movable accessory member actuation process of this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a process of activating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed (steps S3008 to S3011).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 47, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001). That is, the MPU 51 operates timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of is reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002, and if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No ), and the process proceeds to step S3004.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When it is time to start the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts operating the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. A signal is output (step S3002). Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S3003), and ends the movable accessory member operating process.

<Step S3004>
If it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004). That is, the MPU 51 operates timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, if it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005, and if it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No). , the process proceeds to step S3006.

<Step S3006>
If it is time to return the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. Output (step S3005), and terminate the movable accessary member actuation process. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the first motor 39a1.

<Steps S3006 and S3007>
If it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member 39A has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b. (step S3006). Here, when the main movable accessory member 39A returns to the standby position (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to OFF (step S3007), and the movable accessory member operates. End the process. Also, when the main movable accessory member 39A has not returned to the standby position (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
If it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008). That is, the MPU 51 operates timings G1, G3, and G5 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of is reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3009, and if it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
If it is time to start the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 starts operating the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable accessory member 39B. A signal is output (step S3009), and the movable accessory member actuation processing ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the sub-movable accessory member 39B from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

<Step S3010>
If it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010). That is, the MPU 51 operates timings G1, G3, and G5 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, if it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3011, and if it is not the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: No). , terminates the movable accessory member activation process.

<Step S3011>
When it is time to return the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Output (step S3011), and terminate the movable accessary member actuation process. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the sub-movable accessory member 39B from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the second motor 39a2.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, in the same procedure as in the first embodiment, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 during a predetermined touch operation acceptance period, A process of executing a touch operation effect or a process of limiting the execution of the touch operation effect is performed (steps S3101 to S3106). However, in the present embodiment, during the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, the pattern display section 341 Although the touch operation effect is executed or restricted, the touch operation effect on the pattern display section 341 is not executed or restricted during the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3.

Further, in the touch operation effect execution processing of this embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is displayed during the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. A touch operation effect is executed when a touch operation is performed on the front side (steps S3107 to S3111). In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not restricted even during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A or the sub movable accessory member 39B.

<Step S3100>
As shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3100). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the pattern display unit 341 or the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. sent. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by turning on the transmitted flag when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later, for example. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S3100, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the touch operation effect is completed (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341), the touch operation is performed. On the condition that it is the reception period, the touch operation effect may be executed again.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3100: No), the process is stepped. The process proceeds to S3101.

<Step S3101>
If the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of panel 25) on the front side of pattern display portion 341) (step S3101). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 (main touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. . Specifically, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off", the MPU 51 detects the main touch operation. If it is determined that the state corresponds to the main touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation. (see FIG. 46(A)). The detection of the main touch operation by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in this step S3101 does not mean whether or not the main touch operation is actually performed by the player. means to be detected. Therefore, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated, it is determined that the main touch operation has been performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, and the detection of the object by the main movable accessory member 39A is the main touch operation. may be erroneously detected.

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the main detection sensors 38A and 38B have detected the main touch operation (step S3101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B detect the main touch operation. If it is not determined that it has been detected (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag set to ON in step S3003 in the movable accessory member operating process of FIG. 47 is set to ON. Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 determines that during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) On the condition that there is, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. It is transmitted (steps S3103 to S3106, which will be described later).

On the other hand, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, so that the main touch operation state is changed to the main touch operation. If it is determined that it corresponds to the start, even if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON By ending the touch operation effect execution process, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored.

Here, the main movable accessory member in operation flag is the stage when the operation start signal for operating the main movable accessory member 39A is output to the motor driver 39c when the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A is reached. (steps S3001 to S3003 in FIG. 47), the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position at the stage when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the main movable accessory member in operation flag is set to OFF at the stage when the return to the standby position is detected by the return detection unit 39b (steps S3006 and S3007 in FIG. 47), so the main movable accessory member is activated. At the stage where the middle flag is set to OFF, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position. That is, from the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started), the main movable role member The main movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON, and the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection The detection result of sensor 38B is ignored. Therefore, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341. Even if it is detected, regardless of whether it is a touch operation by the player or is based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the detection result of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. is ignored, the touch operation effect is not executed even during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
In step S3103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the second touch operation production for the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is executed in the pattern display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3105.

<Steps S3105 and S3106>
In step S3105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fourth touch operation production for the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3106), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the symbol display portion 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. On the other hand, when it is not the fourth touch operation receiving period R4 (step S3105: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3107>
If it is not determined that a touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) (step S3107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (sub-touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. to decide. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to sub-touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", the sub-touch operation state corresponds to sub-touch operation continuation. (See FIG. 46(B)).

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108, and the sub-touch operation is not detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is determined that (step S3107: No), the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3108). ). Whether it is the first touch operation accepting period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, when it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect during the first touch operation reception period R1. The first touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation accepting period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B. Note that, during the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect is not executed, and the touch operation reception effect A is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49A). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation accepting period R1 (step S3108: No), the process proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3110 and S3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter.

Here, when it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect during the third touch operation reception period R3. The third touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3111), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is executed on the display section 391B. During the third touch operation acceptance period R3, the touch operation acceptance effect is executed, and when the touch operation is started, the touch operation effect B is executed (see FIG. 49(B)). On the other hand, when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process.

As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 43(C)), the main movable accessory By operating the member 39A, the presence of the object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of an object, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A changes the main touch operation state. Since it is determined that it corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, if the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect will be caused by an erroneous detection. is executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39A is started), the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position. Until a certain stage, detection of an object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Therefore, even if the main movable accessory member 39A starts operating after the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the execution of the touch operation effect can be restricted, and of course the main movable accessory member 39A It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect until the returns to the standby position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the main movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, resulting in the execution of the touch operation effect. can be prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, not only the pattern display section 341 but also the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B performs the touch operation effect. Therefore, since the touch operation effect can be diversified, the interest in the game can be improved.

And, in this embodiment, the touch operation effect executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed regardless of whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. As a result, by operating the main movable accessory member 39A, the touch operation performed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is performed at a visible position even if the main movable accessory member 39A is in the operating position. It is possible to prevent the execution from being unnecessarily restricted until the presentation.

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B by a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. By the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B during the first or third touch operation reception periods R1 and R3, the touch operation effect is executed on the pattern display unit 341 on the condition that the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating. You may do so. Conversely, as shown in FIG. 51, the main movable accessory member 39A is not activated by a touch operation on the front side of the pattern display section 341 during the second or fourth touch operation reception periods R2 and R4. , the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B. 50 and 51 exemplify the case where the touch operation reception effect is executed during the touch operation reception period, the touch operation reception effect is not executed during the touch operation reception period. The touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit where the is performed. Furthermore, on the condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the touch operation performance may be executed in a display part different from the display part where the touch operation is performed, and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. On this condition, the touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed.

In this way, when the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed, what type ( It is possible to focus not only on whether the touch operation effect of the degree of expectation) is executed, but also on which display unit the touch operation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, if the touch operation performance is executed on a display part different from the display part where the touch operation is performed under the condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the entertainment of the game is effectively improved. By making it a condition that the result of the lottery is a variable probability jackpot, the amusement of the game can be further effectively improved.

Also, a touch operation on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 and a touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B are simultaneously accepted, and when either touch operation is performed, the pattern display portion 341 and at least one of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect.

Further, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B during operation of the main movable accessory member 39A are ignored. By restricting the execution of the touch operation effect, it is possible to deal with erroneous detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. False detection is prevented by not executing the process of determining whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B while the accessory member operating flag is set to ON. You can respond.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the sub-movable accessory member 39B has the display unit 391B, but the sub-movable accessory member 39B may be configured without the display unit 391B, and the position-fixed non-movable A configuration including a sub-display may be used.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (at the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (activation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started) until the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed), the object detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored, and the touch operation effect is performed. is restricted.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the main movable accessory member is in operation during the touch operation acceptance period for executing the touch operation on the pattern display portion, the touch effect is different from the touch effect on the display portion of the sub movable accessory member. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

52 to 54, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during operation of the main movable accessory member 39A When the second touch operation receiving period R2 starts at 10:00, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed not on the pattern display part 341 but on the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

During the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the touch operation reception effect indicating that it is the touch operation reception period is not executed in the pattern display section 341. executed. Further, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the symbol display section 341 executes the touch operation effect.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (jackpot expectation), or may be an effect irrelevant to the jackpot lottery result. (See FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIGS. 53 and 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the front surface of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is displayed during the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. A touch operation presentation is executed when a touch operation is performed on the side (S3108 to S3111 in FIG. 54).

Further, in the touch operation effect execution processing of this embodiment, unlike the above-described fourth embodiment, during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on. , a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (steps S3202 to S3205 and steps S3208 to S3211 in FIG. 53). The specific performance may be a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big win expectation), or may be a performance unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the big win. (See FIG. 40). The display contents on the display section 391B are controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51 and the like.

<Step S3200>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S3200, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. As shown in FIG. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the pattern display unit 341, or a touch operation effect or a specific effect on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3211 or S3213. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set to ON when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3205, S3207, S3211 or S3213 described later, for example. This can be determined by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3200: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3201.

<Step S3201>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the MPU 51 determines whether a sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (sub-touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the sub-touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off", the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state is It is determined that the sub-touch operation starts, and if the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation continuation ( See FIG. 46(B)).

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the processing after it is determined that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment. If a sub-touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period R3, a command for executing the touch operation is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S3108 to S3111).

On the other hand, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3202 in FIG.

<Step S3202>
When it is not determined that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3202). . Whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3203, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3203. Move to S3208.

<Step S3203>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3203). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3206.

<Steps S3204 and S3205>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. is determined (step S3204). Then, the MPU 51 executes the specific effect determined in step S3204 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3205), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 detects the main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of panel 25) on the front side of pattern display portion 341) (step S3206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. . Specifically, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is "off", "on", and "off", the MPU 51 detects the main touch operation. If it is determined that the state corresponds to the main touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation. (see FIG. 46(A)).

Here, when the main detection sensors 38A and 38B detect the touch operation (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. A 2-touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3207), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is executed in the pattern display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: No), the touch operation effect execution processing ends without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation accepting period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3209, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: No), the touch operation Terminate the production execution process.

<Step S3209>
If it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3209). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3209: No), the process proceeds to step S3212.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. is determined (step S3210). Then, the MPU 51 executes the specific effect determined in step S3210 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3211), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the main movable accessory member in operation flag is set to OFF (step S3209: No), the MPU 51, similarly to the previous step S3206, performs the main operation based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not the detection sensors 38A and 38B have detected the main touch operation (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the design display portion 341) (step S3212). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341 during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. A fourth touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3213), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation accepting period R2 is executed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, when the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not detect the main touch operation (step S3212: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing without executing the touch operation effect.

As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. The presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the existence of the object, the touch operation is performed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, if the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect may be executed due to erroneous detection. occurs.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display section 341, the main movable role On the condition that the object member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (just before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started, the main movable The pattern display section is set to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position after confirming the return of the main movable accessory member 39A. Instead of executing the touch operation effect at 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed at the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, in the second touch operation receiving period R2 or the fourth touch operation receiving period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the pattern display section 341, the touch operation effect is executed even if the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. can be restricted. In addition, instead of the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341, a specific effect is executed on the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, which does not impede visual recognition when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game as compared with the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is simply restricted.

In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 Alternatively, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, and the lottery result is changed. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B on the condition that it is a big win. In this way, when a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display portion 341, the player may not expect it. By executing a specific effect on the display unit, attention is paid not only to what type (expectation) of the touch operation effect is executed, but also to which display unit the effect is executed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, on condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the specific performance is executed in the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B instead of executing the touch operation performance in the pattern display part 341. By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the interest in the game, and by making it a condition that the result of the lottery is a variable probability jackpot, the interest in the game can be further effectively improved.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the game machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory member 39 that is moved between the standby position and the operating position, and by operating the movable accessory member 39, the chance-up effect and the big win are confirmed. A case where a production is executed has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (at the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the period from immediately before the start) to confirmation of the return of the movable accessory member 39 has been described. .

On the other hand, this embodiment is similar to the above-described first embodiment in that it includes a movable accessory member, but differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the movable accessory member has a display section. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member is in operation during the period of receiving the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display unit, the touch effect is different from the touch effect on the display unit of the movable accessory member. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

55 to 57, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the movable accessory member actuation effect executed in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory member 39C has a display section 392C configured by a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the movable accessory member 39C also has a function as a sub-display. At C on the display section 392, for example, when the movable accessory member 39C is at the operating position, an image effect is executed. In this embodiment, when the execution period of the movable accessory member production and the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 7) overlap, a specific production different from the touch operation production is executed instead of the touch operation production. be done. The specific performance may be a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (big win expectation), or may be a performance unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the big win. (See FIG. 40). The display contents on the display section 392</b>C are controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on variable display commands and the like transmitted from the MPU 51 .

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution processing of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, a predetermined area (specification of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is displayed. A touch operation effect can be executed when a touch operation is performed on the area).

Further, in the touch operation effect execution processing of this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, during the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. When there is, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

<Step S3300>
As shown in FIG. 56, in step S3300, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. As shown in FIG. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or executing a specific effect on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3311, S3315, S3316, S3305, or S3320. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3305, S3210, S3320 or S3321 described later, the transmitted flag is set to ON. This can be determined by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3300: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the process is stepped. The process proceeds to S3301.

<Step S3301>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the MPU 51 determines whether a touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (symbol It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the display section 341 (step S3301). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (touch operation state) on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 corresponds to the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 detects the touch operation when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. If the state corresponds to touch operation start and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to touch operation continuation (Fig. 22(B)). It should be noted that the detection of a touch operation by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in step S3301 includes the case of the touch operation by the player and the case of the operation of the movable accessory member 39C. That is, the MPU 51 may erroneously detect that the touch operation state is the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation when the movable accessory member 39C is operated. Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. If it is not detected (step S3301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3302>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3302). Whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3303, and if it is not in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: No), the process proceeds to step S3303. Move to S3307.

<Step S3303>
If it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (step S3303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3304, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3303: No), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (step S3304). Then, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of executing the specific effect determined in step S3304. is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3305), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 in the pattern display part 341.

<Step S3306>
When the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (step S3303: No), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display portion 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1. A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3306), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the symbol display section 341 executes the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1.

<Step S3307>
If it is not the first touch operation accepting period R1 (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3307). Whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3308, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the process continues. 57 step S3312.

<Step S3308>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (step S3308). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3309, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3308: No), the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (step S3309). Then, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S3309. is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3310), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the second reception period R2 in the pattern display section 341.

<Step S3311>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the MPU 51 performs the second touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3311), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the pattern display section 341 executes the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2.

<Step S3312>
As shown in FIG. 57, if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) (step S3312). . Whether it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313; The process proceeds to S3317.

<Step S3313>
If it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (step S3313). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3314, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3313: No), the process proceeds to step S3316.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (step S3314). Then, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S3314. is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3315), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 on the pattern display part 341.

<Step S3316>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3313: No), the MPU 51 performs the third touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3316), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the pattern display section 341 executes the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3.

<Step S3317>
If it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3317). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3318, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: No), the first to Since it can be determined that none of the fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are present, the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated.

<Step S3318>
If it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It judges (step S3318). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3319, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3318: No), the process proceeds to step S3321.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (step S3319). Then, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S3319. is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3320), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the pattern display part 341.

<Step S3321>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3318: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3321), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the symbol display section 341 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341, if the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, a plurality of detection By ignoring the detection results of the sensors 38a to 38d, the touch operation effect is prevented from being executed. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be lost due to the fact that the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display section 341, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on. When it is set, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Therefore, in the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the pattern display section 341, as long as the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed. can be restricted. In addition to that, instead of the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341, a specific effect is executed on the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, which does not interfere with the visual recognition when the movable accessory member 39C is activated. Therefore, by executing a specific effect on a display unit that the player does not expect, not only what type (expectation) of the touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. It is also possible to draw attention to the fact that As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the pattern display unit Instead of executing the touch operation effect at 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, indicating that the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. As a condition, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 392C of the movable accessory member 39C instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display portion 341. By doing so, the amusement of the game can be effectively improved, and by making it a condition that the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the amusement of the game can be further effectively improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display unit 341, Although the specific effect is executed on the display portion 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display portion 392C. In other words, the touch operation effect to be executed in the symbol display section 341 may be executed in the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the specific effect is not necessarily the reception of all touch operations. It does not have to be executed in a period, and it is sufficient that the specific effect is executed in at least one operation reception period.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display section 391B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is performed not only on the pattern display section 341 but also on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. Furthermore, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the main movable accessory member 39A From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the is started) to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position after confirming the return of the main movable accessory member 39A ), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including the movable accessory member 39C having the display portion 392C has been described. Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, during the touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, the movable accessory member operating flag is set. When it is set to ON (from the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39C (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39C is started) until the return of the movable accessory member 39C is confirmed ), the case where a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C has been described.

On the other hand, the game machine according to the present embodiment is similar to the above-described fourth embodiment in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub-movable accessory member having a display unit, but is similar to the above-described sixth embodiment. , the main movable accessory member has a display section, which is different from the above-described fourth embodiment, but is common to the above-described sixth embodiment.

In this embodiment, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the front side of the display unit of the sub movable accessory member. In that case, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part of the main movable accessory member on the condition that a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display part of the sub movable accessory member, It differs from the fourth and sixth embodiments described above.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, focusing on differences from the gaming machines 10 according to the fourth and sixth embodiments.

Here, FIGS. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Note that FIG. 58 shows an example in which a specific effect is executed when a touch operation reception effect indicating that it is a touch operation reception period is not executed (first touch operation reception period R1), and FIG. 59 shows a touch operation reception effect. is executed (third touch operation receiving period R3).

As shown in FIG. 58, during the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect indicating that it is the touch operation reception period is not executed. When a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display section 391B, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the main movable accessory member is displayed instead of the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display section 392A of 39A.

As shown in FIG. 59, during the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect is executed to clearly indicate that it is the touch operation reception period. When a touch operation is performed on the front side of the portion 391B, even if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the main movable accessory is displayed instead of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the member 39A.

In the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set. If it is not set to ON, a touch operation effect is executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (see FIG. 49), as in the fourth embodiment. Further, the specific production may be a production indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (jackpot expectation), or may be a production unrelated to the jackpot lottery result. (See FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation performance execution process of the present embodiment, during the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the flag during operation of the main movable accessory member is turned on. While it is set (the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started)) , until the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored. , the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (steps S3101 to S3106 in FIG. 60).

Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF, the sub movable role When an object exists on the front side of the display portion 391B of the object member 39B, instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the touch operation effect is performed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. A specific effect different from is executed (steps S3401 to S3105 and steps S3407 to S3110 in FIG. 61).

<Steps S3101 to S3106>
As shown in FIG. 60, when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of panel 25) on the front side of pattern display section 341 (step S3101: Yes), MPU 51 turns on the main movable accessory member operating flag. (step S3102: Yes), the touch operation effect execution processing is terminated without executing the touch operation effect. On the other hand, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), on condition that it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3103 or If Yes in S3105), a touch operation effect execution command for executing a touch operation effect in the pattern display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104 or S3106).

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 61, when the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not determine that the main touch operation has been detected, the MPU 51 detects that there is no object in the predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display section 341. case) (step S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3400). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display portion 341 or the sub movable accessory member and executing a specific effect on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Alternatively, it is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3411. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, steps S3405, S3406, S3410 or S3411 described later, for example. The determination can be made by setting a flag to ON and confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3400: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3401.

<Step S3401>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3401). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (sub-touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off". When the combination of the three sub-touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to continued sub-touch operation (see FIG. 46(B)).

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3402, and the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined (step S3401: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation accepting period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3403, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: No), the process proceeds to step S3403. Move to S3407.

<Step S3403>
If it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3403). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3403: No), the process proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. is determined (step S3404). Then, the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of step S3404. A specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 being performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. be.

<Step S3406>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A first touch operation effect execution command for execution is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3406), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation accepting period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether it is the third touch operation accepting period R3 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3408, and if it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: No), the touch operation Terminate the production execution process.

<Step S3408>
If it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3408). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3409, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3408: No), the process proceeds to step S3411.

<Steps S3409 and S3410>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. is determined (step S3409). Then, the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), instead of step S3409. A specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined by the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3410), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 being performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. be.

<Step S3411>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A third touch operation effect execution command for execution is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3411), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is executed on the display section 391B.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that a touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (when an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341), the movable role If the object member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be lost due to the fact that the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is movable during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 during which the touch operation effect can be executed. When the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is touched. A specific effect different from the operation effect is executed. Therefore, in the first or third touch operation acceptance period R1 or R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display section 341, the touch operation effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. can be restricted. In addition, during the first or third touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R3, instead of the touch operation effect on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. A specific effect is executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, by executing a specific effect on a display unit that the player does not expect, not only what type (expectation) of the touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. It is also possible to draw attention to the fact that As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Well, on the condition that the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the display section of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If the specific performance is executed at 392A, the interest in the game can be effectively improved, and the interest in the game can be further effectively improved by making it a condition that the result of the lottery is a probability variable jackpot. can be made

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect on the pattern display section 341 Although the specific effect is executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of executing , the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display section 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B may be executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display section 391B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is performed not only on the pattern display section 341 but also on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. Furthermore, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the main movable accessory member 39A From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the operation of the is started) to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position after confirming the return of the main movable accessory member 39A ), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common to the above-described fourth embodiment in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub-movable accessory member having a display section. In the second touch operation reception period or the fourth touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the sub movable A touch operation reception effect is executed on the display part of the accessory member, and a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part of the main movable accessory member by a touch operation on the front side of the display part of the sub movable accessory member. It is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is started, instead of the touch operation effect, the touch operation acceptance effect is executed in the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, not in the pattern display part 341 where the touch operation effect is executed. Then, during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, an object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Also, although not shown, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the second touch operation reception period R2, or when the main movable accessory member 39A is in operation, the second touch operation reception period R2 is started. Also in this case, instead of the touch operation effect, the touch operation acceptance effect is executed in the display part 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, not in the pattern display part 341 where the touch operation effect is executed. Then, during the second touch operation reception period R2, while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, an object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Further, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the symbol display section 341 executes the touch operation effect.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (jackpot expectation), or may be an effect irrelevant to the jackpot lottery result. (See FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIGS. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in this embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, at least part of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 overlaps with the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. In this case, the execution of the touch operation effect on the pattern display portion 341 is restricted, and the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Then, if a touch operation is executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while this touch operation acceptance effect is being executed, the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C will display a different touch operation effect. A specific effect is executed.

<Step S3500>
As shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3500). This production execution command causes the pattern display section 341 to execute a touch operation production, the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to execute a specific production different from the touch operation production, and the display section of the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is a command for executing a touch operation acceptance effect or a touch operation effect at 391B, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 at steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, and S3109, S3111, or S3516 in FIG. 64, which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, S3109, S3111 or S3516 in FIG. The determination can be made by setting a sent flag to ON and confirming whether or not the sent flag is set to ON.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3500: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3514, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the process proceeds to step S3501. Transition.

<Step S3501>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether a sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (sub-touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to start of the sub-touch operation when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off". When the combination of the to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", and "off", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to continued sub-touch operation (see FIG. 46(B)).

Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. is not detected (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is not detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3502). . Whether it is the second touch operation accepting period R2 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3503; Move to S3508.

<Step S3503>
If it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3503). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3504, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3503: No), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reception flag for specific effect to ON (step S3504). This specific effect reception flag is displayed on the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the second or fourth touch operation reception periods R2 and R4. It is a flag indicating that the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has received a touch operation for executing a touch operation effect, and is referred to in step S3514 described later. Then, the MPU 51 transmits the touch operation acceptance effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and ends the touch operation effect execution process. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, the main movable role is displayed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. A touch operation reception effect is executed to indicate that a touch operation for executing a touch operation effect is being received on the display portion 392C of the material member 39C.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 51 detects the main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of panel 25) on the front side of pattern display portion 341) (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 (main touch operation state) corresponds to the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "off", "on", and "off". Then, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is "on", "off", or "off", it is determined that the main touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the main touch operation (Fig. 46 (A )reference). Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the pattern display section 341 to execute the touch operation effect during the second touch operation acceptance period R2. A second touch operation effect execution command is set for and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3507), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation accepting period R2 is executed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. On the other hand, when the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3508>
If it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3508). Whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3509, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: No), the touch operation Terminate the production execution process.

<Step S3509>
If it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. (step S3509). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3509: No), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reception flag for specific effect to ON (step S3510) in the same manner as in step S3504, and touch operation reception effect An execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3611), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, the main movable role is displayed on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. A touch operation reception effect is executed to indicate that a touch operation for executing a touch operation effect is being received on the display portion 392C of the material member 39C.

<Steps S3512 and S3513>
If the main movable accessory member in operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), the MPU 51 performs the same procedure as in step S3506, based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation has been detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the design display portion 341). Then, when it is determined that the main detection sensors 38A and 38B have detected the main touch operation (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. A fourth touch operation effect execution command for is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. As a result, a touch operation effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not detect the main touch operation (step S3512: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution processing without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3514>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reception flag for specific effect set to ON in step S3510 or S3516 is set to ON (step S3514). Here, when the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3515 in FIG. (Step S3501: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S3515>
When the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3514: Yes), as shown in FIG. 64, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. (Step S3515). Here, if it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3516, and if it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4. (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to step S3519.

<Step S3516>
If it is the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 or R4 (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the same procedure as step S3501 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) (step S3516). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3517, and the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined (step S3516: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect (a different effect from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. ) is determined (step S3517). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step S3517 on the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C (step S3618), and the touch operation effect End the execution process. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second or fourth touch operation receiving periods R2, R4 in the pattern display part 341, the specific effect is executed in the display part 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. .

<Step S3519>
If it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: No), or if a specific effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3618), the specific effect reception flag is set to OFF. , the touch operation effect execution processing ends. In other words, when the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 ends, or when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed, the specific effect flag that allows the specific effect to be executed is turned off. , and ends the acceptance for executing the specific effect.

<Steps S3108 to S3111>
If there is an object on the front side of the display section 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 will perform (Yes in step S3108 or S3110), the first or third touch operation effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111). Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111), or when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 ( No at step S3108 or S3110), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, when an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to By ignoring the detection result at 38d, the touch operation effect is prevented from being executed. However, there is a concern that interest in the game may be lost due to the fact that the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at least one of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period in which the movable accessary member in-operation flag is set to ON. When the part overlaps, the execution of the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341 is restricted, and the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display part 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. Then, when the touch operation is performed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while this touch operation acceptance effect is being executed, the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C will display a different touch operation effect. A specific effect is executed. Therefore, during the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2 or R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display section 341, even if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation is performed. A reception performance is executed. In addition, during the second or fourth touch operation acceptance periods R2 and R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display section 341, a sub-movable accessory that does not hinder visual recognition when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated is displayed. A touch operation reception effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the member 39B, and a specific effect is executed by performing a touch operation on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B during execution of the touch operation reception effect. Therefore, the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display unit that the player does not expect, and the specific effect is executed by performing the touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B in response to the unexpected touch operation reception. . As a result, the player can focus not only on what type (expectation) of the touch operation effect will be executed, but also on which display unit the effect will be executed. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 , Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display part 341, the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display part 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the specific effect is executed on the display part 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. Alternatively, the preceding touch operation reception effect or specific effect may be executed on condition that the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the pattern display unit 341, the touch operation reception effect or the specific effect is executed. If so, it is possible to effectively improve the interest in the game, and by making it a condition that the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, it is possible to further effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a movable role product member operation effect is executed in which the movable role product member moves between the standby position and the operating position, and the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case of detecting the existence of an object in a predetermined area of the has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON (at the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the period from immediately before the start) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed) has been described. .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the movable accessory member actuation effect, a fake action is performed in which the movable accessory member is moved between the standby position and an intermediate position set between the standby position and the operating position. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that effects are executed. Further, in this embodiment, one detection sensor 38 is provided, and the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is detected by the detection sensor 38, which is different from the above-described first embodiment. different.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 65 shows the movable role member referred to when the production pattern type is the special ready-to-win production in the movable role member actuation timing determination process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 8 is a diagram showing an example of an object/member operation timing selection table C; FIG. In FIG. 65, "◎" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a big win confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and "○" indicates a chance-up effect (a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). 39 is operated, "△" is fake operation of the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member is operated to the intermediate position instead of the standby position), and "x" is the movable accessory member 39 is not activated, "-" means that there is no corresponding activation period.

Here, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the fake action effect of the movable accessory member executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fake actuation effect, the movable accessory member 39 at the standby position moves to an intermediate position set between the actuation position (the position indicated by the virtual line) and the standby position, and then moves to the standby position. return to In addition, a detection sensor 38 for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is arranged in the central portion on the right side of the pattern display portion 341 . With this detection sensor 38, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected when the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position or the intermediate position, and the movable accessory member 39 is detected when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position. detected.

Returning to the description of FIG. 65, the movable accessory member actuation timing selection table C referred to when the production pattern type is the special ready-to-win production pattern is the production pattern type (production patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special ready-to-win production patterns. For each, depending on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member activation effect) ), and whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is to be faked is stipulated.

For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is fake operated at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and at the operation timing G3. The movable accessory member 39 is operated, and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the remaining operating timings G1, G4 to G6. That is, when the performance pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation performance is executed as the chance up performance only immediately after the start of the super ready-to-win performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern.

Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake operated. That is, when the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot and the production pattern Z3 is selected, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot fixed production (one-shot notification production) immediately after the start and at the end of the special reach production in the special reach production pattern. An action presentation is executed.

Further, when the performance pattern type is the performance pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the fake operation performance is executed at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timings G3, G5, G5. , and the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake-operated at the remaining operating timings G1 and G4. Incidentally, at the actuation timings G5 and G6, the actuation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed as a big hit confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect). That is, when the lottery result is a 16R normal jackpot and the performance pattern Z4 is selected, the fake operation performance is executed immediately after the normal reach performance in the special reach performance pattern is started, and the chance up performance is performed immediately after the super performance is started. An accessory member actuation effect is executed, and a movable accessory member actuation effect is executed as a jackpot determination effect (one-shot notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect and at the end.

In addition, FIG. 65 shows the movable accessory member actuation timing selection table C that is referred to when the production pattern type is the special ready-to-win production pattern. Also, the movable accessory member 39 may be fake operated.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the movable accessory member operation process, in addition to the operation of the movable accessory member 39 to the operating position, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 to the intermediate position is controlled.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 . That is, the MPU 51 starts the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 and 65) of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Determine whether the value corresponding to the point in time has been reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602, and if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No). , the process proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3602 to S3605>
If it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 by fake operation (step S3602). When it is time to activate the movable accessory member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602: Yes), the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 is connected to the movable accessory member 39. A first actuation start signal for moving from the standby position to the intermediate position is output (step S3603), and the movable accessory member actuation processing ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the intermediate position by controlling the motor 39a.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing of activating the movable accessory member 39 by fake operation (step S3602: No), that is, if it is the timing to operate the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, the movable accessory member 39 A second actuation start signal for moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the actuation position is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that imparts the driving force (step S3604). Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable role product member operating flag to ON (step S3605), and ends the movable role product member operating process. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3606 and S3607>
If it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606). That is, the MPU 51 determines the counter value of the variable display counter based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Determine whether the value corresponding to the point in time has been reached. Here, when it is time to return the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (step S3607), and the movable accessary member actuation process ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position or intermediate position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( step S3608). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 returns from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation. (step S3609). When the movable accessory member 39 returns from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation processing and returns the movable accessory member based on the fake operation. 39 is not returned to the standby position (step S3609: No), that is, if the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF, and the movable accessory member is set to OFF. Terminate the accessory member activation process.

In this embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the intermediate position, the detection sensor 38 does not detect the movable accessory member 39 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, that is, when the movable accessory member 39 performs a fake operation, the touch operation effect is provided on the condition that the touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period. is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation performance from being restricted even in the case of the fake actuation of the movable accessory member 39, and by preventing the execution of the touch operation performance from being restricted more than necessary, it is possible to improve the performance of the game. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by ignoring the detection signal from the detection sensor 38 as in the first embodiment. Alternatively, the execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted by not performing the process of confirming the detection by the detection sensor 38 as in the second embodiment. In other words, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted from the time it is decided to drive the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position until the time the motor 39a starts to be driven. , and the restriction on the execution of the touch operation effect may be released when the return detection unit 39b detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position.

Also, when the period during which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON overlaps with the touch operation acceptance period, a specific effect (see FIG. 40) may be executed instead of the touch operation effect. . In this case, the specific effect may be executed by the movable accessory member 39A having a display unit (see FIG. 54), or may be executed by the display unit. Assuming that the accessory member is provided (see FIG. 43), it may be executed by the display section of the sub-movable accessory member.

[Tenth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a movable role product member operation effect is executed in which the movable role product member moves between the standby position and the operating position, and the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case of detecting the existence of an object in a predetermined area of the has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39 is operating is set to ON, detection by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d A case has been described where the result is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member (timing to start the operation effect of the movable accessory member) during the touch operation reception period, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect is restricted by not executing the processing for starting the accessory member actuation effect.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
In the movable accessory member actuation process of this embodiment, a process of moving the movable accessory member between the standby position and the actuation position is executed in the same manner as the movable accessory member actuation process of the first embodiment. However, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started in any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, which is different from the movable accessory member activation process of the first embodiment. .

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of is reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3702, and if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No). , the process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
If it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702). Whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 You may judge by operating the counter for judging whether it is. Here, if the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 (step S3502: No), the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 is activated. Output a start signal. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the motor 39a. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the movable accessory member (step S3704), and ends the movable accessory member operation processing.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S2702: Yes), the movable accessory member actuation process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, even if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Without ending the movable accessory member operation processing. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect) during the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 is restricted.

<Step S3705>
If it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 set in step S3704 (step S3705). Here, when it is time to return the movable accessory member 39 (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (step S3706), and the movable accessary member actuation process ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position by controlling the motor 39a. On the other hand, if it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3704: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation processing.

As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory member actuation effect for actuating the movable accessory member and the In some cases, a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the pattern display portion. In this type of game machine, the touch operation effect may be executed unexpectedly due to the operation of the movable accessory member during the touch operation accepting period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and thus the touch operation effect may be executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 Even at the operation start timing of , the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the touch operation effect is executed. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be restricted in one touch operation receiving period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the first and second touch operation reception periods R1 and R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member actuation effect without doing.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the movable accessory member The case where the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process for starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) has been explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member (timing to start the operation effect of the movable accessory member) during the touch operation reception period, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable This is the same as the tenth embodiment in that the processing for starting the operation effect of the movable accessory member is not executed, but the operation of the movable accessory member starts after the touch operation acceptance period ends start), which is different from the tenth embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. Here, FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
The movable accessory member actuation processing of this embodiment is basically the same as the movable accessory member actuation processing of the tenth embodiment described above, but the start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is the first to fourth touches. When it is the operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is suspended (step S3801), and the suspended operation of the movable accessory member 39 ends the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is different from the movable accessory member actuation process of the tenth embodiment described above in that it is performed later (steps S3802, S3803 and S3703).

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 69, when the MPU 51 is at the start time (operation start timing) of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the first If it is the fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S3702: Yes), the role product operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3801). This accessory operation suspension flag is a flag for starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) after the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is referred to in S3802.

It should be noted that the MPU 51, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702: No), the tenth In the same way as in the above embodiment, an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3703), and the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If it is neither the operation start timing nor the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (No in both steps S3701 and S3705), the MPU 51 determines whether the accessory operation suspension flag set to ON in step S3801 is set to ON. It judges (step S3802). If the role product operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3803: No), the process proceeds to step S3703. That is, when the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), the operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c at the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) (step S3703), and move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position. As in the tenth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member 39 at the standby position outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c when it is the return timing set in step S3704 (step S3705: Yes). (step S3706) to return to the standby position.

By the way, in the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the movable role By not executing the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable role product member operation effect), it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the pattern display part 341 is performed by the operation of the movable role product member 39. prevent this from happening. However, since the movable accessory member actuation effect in which the movable accessory member 39 is operated is usually executed as a chance-up effect or a big hit confirmation effect, if such an effect with a high degree of expectation is not executed, interest in the game will increase. It is feared that interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member actuation effect) during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 Although the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed when it is determined that the touch operation reception period R1 After the end of ~R4, the movable accessory member actuation effect is executed. In other words, by preventing the movable accessory member actuation effect from starting during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the pattern display section 341 has been performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. While preventing this, after the touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 are finished, the movable accessary member actuation performance, which is generally performed as a performance with high expectations, is executed, thereby suppressing the decline in interest and amusement in the game. .

In the present embodiment, the suspended movable accessory member actuation effect is started after it is confirmed that the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 have ended. It may be set regardless of the end of the touch operation accepting periods R1 to R4. For example, when the touch operation effect is executed, it may be after the touch operation effect is completed, or after it is confirmed that the touch operation on the pattern display section 341 has been performed. In addition, the suspended movable accessory member actuation is performed on the condition that the player does not perform a touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, and the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 ends. Execution may start later.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the movable accessory member The case where the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted due to the fact that the process for starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) is not executed has been explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, there is a process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect). This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the execution of the movable accessary member actuation effect during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not being executed.

Hereinafter, the game machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. Here, FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 70, in the movable accessory member actuation process of this embodiment, unlike the movable accessory member actuation process of the tenth embodiment described above, during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 It is first determined whether there is (step S3901), and on the condition that it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3902: No), whether it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 It is determined whether or not (step S3902). On the other hand, in the movable accessory member activation process of the present embodiment, if it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not it is time to return the movable accessory member 39 (step S3905) without executing the process of determining (step S3902). In addition, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3902: Yes) and if it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3905: Yes), the subsequent processing procedure is the tenth above-mentioned It is similar to the embodiment.

As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory member actuation effect for actuating the movable accessory member and the In some cases, a touch operation effect is executed by the player performing a touch operation on the front side of the pattern display portion. In this type of game machine, the touch operation effect may be executed unexpectedly due to the operation of the movable accessory member during the touch operation accepting period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and thus the touch operation effect may be executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, whether it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) The process of determining whether or not is not executed. In other words, during the touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect is restricted. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the touch operation effect is executed. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be restricted in one touch operation receiving period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the first and second touch operation reception periods R1 and R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted during the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member actuation effect without doing.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the movable accessory member The case where the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted due to the fact that the process for starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) is not executed has been explained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is basically determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) during the touch operation reception period, as in the tenth embodiment described above. If it is, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in that the movable accessory member is activated under specific conditions when the premium effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect. different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the premium effect is to be executed as the touch operation effect, the player can select the front side of the symbol display portion within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation acceptance period. If no touch operation is performed on the predetermined area, a jackpot confirmation effect is executed with the forced activation of the movable accessory parts, and a premium effect as a touch operation effect is performed using the false detection due to the forced activation of the movable accessory parts. executed.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous effect of the movable accessory member actuation effect and the touch operation effect executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied, a continuous effect of the movable accessary member actuation effect and the touch operation effect is executed. For example, when the premium effect is selected as the touch operation effect, the player may perform When the touch operation is not performed, a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed, and the movable accessory member 39 is detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Then, the premium effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. This is an effect that generates a rainbow effect Ef in the surrounding area. In addition, as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot announcement effect) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory member 39, for example, a rainbow lamp executed by a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the periphery of the movable accessory member 39 For example, it is conceivable that the operation mode of the movable accessory member 39 is changed to a special operation mode different from the normal one. Also, the premium effect is a effect with an extremely low selection rate compared to other effects, and is at least an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win. In this embodiment, the premium effect is a probability variable jackpot fixed effect that is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. It is an image effect that moves from right to left. Of course, the premium effect may be another effect such as an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

In the movable accessory member activation process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period, the movable accessory member is activated. This embodiment is common to the tenth embodiment in that the processing for starting the operation (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the player touches a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation acceptance period. If no operation is performed, a jackpot confirmation effect is executed with the forced actuation of the movable accessory member, and a premium effect is executed as a touch operation effect using an erroneous detection due to the forced actuation of the movable accessory member. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4006>
As shown in FIG. 72, when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 has come (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 has first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: Yes). , While ending the movable accessory member operation processing, if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: No), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c and the movable accessory The member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position (step S4003), the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set (step S4004), and the movable accessory member operating process ends. As a result, as in the tenth embodiment described above, during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the processing for starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not executed, so that the movable accessory member 39 Restricted movement.

Also, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the MPU 51, if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: No), if it is the return timing (step S4005: Yes), the motor driver 39c A return signal is output to return the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position (step S4006), and the movable accessory member operating process ends.

<Step S4007>
When the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (No in both steps S4001 and S4005), the MPU 51 executes a process different from that of the tenth embodiment. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4007), and if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 exist (step S4007: Yes). , the process proceeds to step S4008, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: No), the movable accessory member actuation process ends.

<Step S4008>
If it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. (Step S4008), if the predetermined time has elapsed (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S4008: No), the movable accessory member operation processing exit. Here, the predetermined time is a limit for determining to forcibly operate the movable accessory member 39, and the first to the first to execute the touch operation effect using the malfunction of the movable accessory member 39. It is set to a time shorter than the 4-touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The predetermined time may be set to the same time for all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, or may be set individually for each of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. good too.

<Step S4009>
When the predetermined time has passed since the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009). This forced operation flag is displayed in a pattern when the player does not perform a touch operation within a predetermined period of time from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, that is, before the predetermined period of time has passed. This is a flag for forcibly activating the movable accessory member 39 when the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the part 341 is not confirmed, and is a flag for the touch operation effect execution processing in steps S4105 and S4109 of FIG. 73 described later. , S4113 or S4117.

Here, if the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4010, and if the forced operation flag is not set to ON (step S4009: No), The movable accessory member activation process is ended.

<Step S4010>
When the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 transmits a command to execute the finalized operation effect to the display control device 6 (step S4010). As a result, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 causes the pattern display section 341 to execute an image effect associated with the forced actuation of the movable accessory member 39 . In the present embodiment, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs an image production to generate a rainbow effect Ef (see FIG. 71) around the movable accessory member 39 at the timing when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position. The display unit 341 is made to execute.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S<b>4003 when transmitting the confirmation operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 . As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started, and the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position at the return timing set in step S4004 (steps S4004 to S4006). That is, when a touch operation is not performed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (Yes in both steps S4007 and S4008), the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect. The movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated even if it is not the operation start timings G1 to G6 (see FIG. 27) of the movable accessory member 39 based on the forced operation flag that is set to ON.

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

The touch operation effect execution processing of this embodiment is basically the same as that of the tenth embodiment described above, but when the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated. The tenth embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in that a forced operation flag for is set to ON.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 73, in steps S4101 to S4103, similar to the tenth embodiment described above, it is determined that a touch operation has been detected by the detection sensor 38 based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags. (when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the pattern display unit 341) (step S4101: Yes), if it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S4102: Yes) , a first touch operation effect execution command for causing the pattern display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4103).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4103), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premium effect is determined as the first touch operation effect. If there is (step S4104: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4105), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
In steps S4106 and S4107, as in the tenth embodiment described above, if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S4106: Yes), the second touch operation effect during the second touch operation reception period R2 is performed. A second touch operation effect execution command for executing the pattern display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4107).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the second touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4107), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premium effect is determined as the second touch operation effect. If there is (step S4108: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4109), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4110 to S4113>
In steps S4110 and S4111, as in the tenth embodiment described above, if it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S4110: Yes), the third touch operation effect during the third touch operation reception period R3 is performed. A third touch operation effect execution command for executing the pattern display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4111).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4111), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premium effect is determined as the third touch operation effect. If there is (step S4112: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4113), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4114 to S4117>
In steps S4114 and S4115, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, if it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S4114: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is performed. A fourth touch operation effect execution command for executing the pattern display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4115).

Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the fourth touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4115), unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the premium effect is determined as the fourth touch operation effect. If there is (step S4116: Yes), the forced operation flag that enables the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4117), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, even when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 comes during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the process for starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not executed. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39 .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is provided when the player does not perform the touch operation after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. 39 is forcibly actuated to execute a big win determination effect, and a premium effect determined as a touch operation effect is executed due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39. - 特許庁Therefore, even though the touch operation is not executed while the touch operation is being accepted, the forced actuation of the movable accessory member 39, which is difficult for the player to anticipate, can surprise the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. and interest can be improved.

Furthermore, by utilizing the erroneous detection based on the forced actuation of the movable accessory member 39, the premium effect is forcibly executed as a touch operation effect regardless of the intention of the player, so that the selection rate of the carefully selected is extremely high. It is possible to prevent the execution of a low premium effect from being skipped (cancelled). As a result, when a rarely seen premium performance is determined as a touch operation performance, the player can surely see the premium performance.

In addition, by using erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, "(touch operation effect →) jackpot confirmation effect with forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 → premium effect", which has never existed before. A series of shocking and interesting performances can be realized. As a result, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest and interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, the method of restricting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be another method. For example, when it is the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39. (for example, the twelfth embodiment).

Also, the premium effect may be executed as a jackpot fixed effect instead of the probability variable big win fixed effect.

Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the forced operation flag can be set to ON during all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The forced operation flag may be set to ON during at least one touch operation reception period among the operation reception periods R1 to R4. In this case, it is preferable that the forced operation flag can be set to ON during one or both of the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 during which the touch operation reception effect is executed.

[14th embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including two movable accessory members, ie, the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub-movable accessory member 39B having the display section 391B has been described. Also, the sub-movable accessory member 39B of the fourth embodiment described above is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B.

Further, in the above-described tenth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 having one movable accessory member 39, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member actuation effect is performed during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4). A case has been described in which the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) is not executed when it is determined that it is the timing to start.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes two movable accessory members (the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub-movable accessory member 39B having the display section 391B) similar to those of the fourth embodiment. , during the touch operation acceptance period, the processing for starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed, but the processing for starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed. different from

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the movable accessory member activation processing of this embodiment, the processing of activating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the processing of activating the movable accessory member 39 of the tenth embodiment ( steps S4201 to S4206). Further, in the movable accessory member activation process of this embodiment, unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the process of activating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the same procedure as in the fourth embodiment described above. (steps S4207 to S4210).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 74, in step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 operates timings G2, G4, and G6 of the movable accessory member 39 whose counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start point of is reached. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4202 if it is time to start the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), and if it is not the time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4201: No ), and the process proceeds to step S4205.

<Steps S4202 to S4204>
If it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202). Whether or not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 can be determined by referring to, for example, the counter value of the variation display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 You may judge by operating the counter for judging whether it is. Here, if the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: No), the motor driver that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A An operation start signal is output to 39c (step S4203), and the movable accessory member operation processing ends. Thereby, the motor driver 39c moves the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position by controlling the first motor 39a1. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4204), and ends the movable accessory member operation processing.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: Yes), the movable accessory member actuation process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, even if it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started when it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The movable accessary member activation process is ended without doing so. This restricts the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A during the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4.

<Steps S4205 to S4210>
If it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: No), the MPU 51, if it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4205: Yes), the motor that drives the first motor 39a1 A return signal is output to the driver 39c (step S4206), and when it is the operation start timing of the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S4207: Yes), the second that applies the driving force to the sub-movable accessory member 39B An operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a2 (step S4208), and when it is time to return the sub-movable accessory member 39B (step S4209: Yes), the sub-movable accessory member 39B is driven. A return signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies force (step S4210).

In addition, the MPU 51 can be any of the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If not (No in steps S4201, S4205, S4207 and S4209), the movable accessory member actuation process is terminated. Also, when the operation start signal or return signal is output to the motor driver 39c (steps S4206, S4208 or S4210), the movable accessory member operation processing is terminated.

By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by not executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A during the first to fourth touch operation accepting periods R1 to R4, the main movable accessory Movement of member 39A is restricted. This prevents erroneous detection that a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is executed during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. operation is not restricted. Here, the sub-movable accessory member 39B of this embodiment is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, in this embodiment, even if the sub-movable accessory member 39B is operated, no erroneous detection occurs. Therefore, since the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is not restricted, it is possible to prevent the operation from being unnecessarily restricted to the operation of the sub-movable accessory member 39B that does not cause malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being excessively restricted, thereby preventing the performance from becoming monotonous and suppressing the decrease in the interest and amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, by not executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not performed. Although limited, other methods of limiting the actuation of the main movable accessory member 39A may be used. For example, when it is the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A. (See the twelfth embodiment described above).

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B has the display section 391B, but the sub movable accessory member 39B may be configured without the display section 391B.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the main movable accessory member actuation effect is restricted during the reception periods R1 to R4, the execution of the main movable accessory member actuation effect is suspended, and the suspended main movable accessory member The operation effect may be executed after the receiving periods R1 to R4 or after the touch operation effect is finished (see the eleventh embodiment described above).

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are set while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. A case has been described in which the detection result of an object in is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

Further, in the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the movable role The case where the process for starting the actuation of the object member 39 (starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) is not executed has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation reception period and the execution period of the movable accessory member actuation effect overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted when the movable accessory member actuation effect is started first. , differs from the above-described first and tenth embodiments in that the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect is restricted when the touch operation acceptance period starts first.

For example, when the movable accessory member actuation effect is started before the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member is in operation, as in the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment. While the flag is set to ON, the results of object detection by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and execution of the touch operation presentation is restricted (see FIG. 37). Of course, in this embodiment, by adopting the same configuration as in the above-described second to ninth embodiments and executing the same touch operation effect execution processing as in the above-described second to ninth embodiments, the movable Execution of the touch operation presentation may be restricted while the accessory member is in operation.

Further, when the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are started before the movable accessory member actuation effect, as in the tenth embodiment described above, during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member When it is determined that it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the operation effect of the movable accessory member), the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the operation effect of the movable accessory member) is not executed. , the execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect is restricted (see FIG. 68). Of course, in this embodiment, by adopting the same configuration as in the above-described 11th to 14th embodiments and performing the same movable accessory member actuation processing as in the above-described 11th to 14th embodiments, Execution of the movable accessory member actuation effect may be restricted during the touch operation reception period.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has advantages when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the operation of the movable accessory member, and when the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted during the touch operation acceptance period. You can enjoy the benefits of That is, when the touch operation reception period and the execution period of the movable accessory member actuation effect overlap, when the movable accessory member actuation effect is started first, or when the touch operation acceptance period is started first Even if there is, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of the touch operation effect due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39 .

[16th embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B cannot detect the presence of an object in the operation area (the left area of the pattern display section 341) of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has been described. .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the two main detection sensors detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display portion excluding the left side area of the pattern display portion. , in that, in addition to the two main detection sensors, a sub-detection sensor for detecting the presence of an object in the front side area of the left side area of the pattern display portion is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor have different detection ranges in the pattern display section, and each detection sensor individually detects the presence of an object. Then, when the movable accessory member does not operate and is at the standby position, the presence of the object is detected by both the main detection sensor and the sub-detection sensor, and when the movable accessory member operates, the pattern is displayed only by the sub-detection sensor. This embodiment also differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the presence of an object is detected in the front side area of the left side area of the part. Also, in this embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B in the fourth embodiment is not provided, and a movable accessory member corresponding to the main movable accessory member 39A is provided. Different from the embodiment.

75 and 76, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, and 38D with respect to the symbol display portion 341 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a movable accessory member 39, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B and a sub detection sensor 38E.

The movable accessory member 39 is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the main movable accessory member 39A of the fourth embodiment. Between a predetermined first standby position (see FIG. 4) positioned above the motor 341 and a second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position, the first motor 39a1 It is possible to move in the vertical direction along the surface of the pattern display portion 341 by the driving force from the .

The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are the same as the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 39B of the above-described fourth embodiment, and the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B. The overlap detection range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is The left part (the operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part, and the lower right part are the central area, and the touch operation in the operation area of the movable accessory member 39 can be detected.

The sub-detection sensor 38E is arranged to the left of the second main detection sensor 38B, and detects the presence of an object in the front-side left area of the pattern display section 341 . The detection range of the sub-detection sensor 38E does not overlap with the overlapping detection ranges of the first and second main detection sensors 38A, 38B. That is, the sub-detection sensor 38E can detect a touch operation in the left area of the operation area of the movable accessory member 39 that cannot be detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the detection range is shared by the first main detection sensor 38A, the second main detection sensor 38B, and the sub detection sensor 38E. The presence or absence of a touch operation is individually detected in the left area outside the operation range of 39 .

In this embodiment, the touch operation state is determined based on three touch operation detection flags by the same method as in the first embodiment described above, and the touch operation state is determined by the first to third touch operation pattern flags. are stored in the RAM 412 as a combination of on and off (see FIG. 22(B)).

[Touch operation effect execution processing]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B capable of detecting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 Whether or not there is a touch operation in the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 is determined based on the detection result of the sub-detection sensor 38E, which cannot detect the operation of the movable accessory member 39 without confirming the detection result. When the movable accessory member 39 is not in operation during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If the touch operation is not confirmed based on the detection result of , the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection result of the sub sensor 38E.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 51 determines whether the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4301), and if the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (Step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Step S4302>
When it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4302). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the pattern display unit 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308, which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set so that the transmitted flag is set to ON when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S4301, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the touch operation effect is completed (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the pattern display section 341), the touch operation is performed. On the condition that it is the reception period, the touch operation effect may be executed again.

Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the process proceeds to step Move to S4303.

<Step S4303>
If the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member is in operation is set to ON ( step S4303). Here, when the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4307, and the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S4303: No), the process proceeds to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S4303: No), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the central area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. It is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in the central area on the front side of the pattern display portion 341) (step S4304). Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. (step S4304: No), the process proceeds to step S4305.

<Step S4305>
When it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 selects a combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the sub-detection sensor 38E has detected a touch operation (whether or not an object exists in the left area on the front side of the design display section 341) (step S4305). Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. If so (step S4305: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4306>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B or the sub detection sensor 38E (Yes in step S4304 or S4305), the MPU 41 determines the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of the command determination process. is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4306), and the touch operation effect execution processing ends.

<Step S4307>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. It is determined whether or not the sub-detection sensor 38E has detected a touch operation (whether or not an object exists in the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341) (step S4307). That is, when the movable accessory member in operation flag is set to ON (when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation) (step S4303: Yes), the main detection sensors 38A and 38B perform a touch operation on the central region. It is determined whether or not the sub-detection sensor 38E has detected a touch operation on the left side area without determining whether or not has been detected.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4308, and it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. If so (step S4307: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
When it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 performs alternative touch operation effect determination processing for determining an alternative touch operation effect to be executed in the left area of the pattern display section 341. is executed (step S4308). Then, the MPU 41 sets an alternative touch operation effect execution command for causing the pattern display unit 341 to execute the alternative touch operation effect and transmits it to the display control device 6 (step S4308). As a result, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left area of the pattern display portion 341 . That is, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the left side area of the pattern display section 341 where visual recognition is not hindered by the movable accessory member 39 at the operating position. An alternative touch operation presentation is executed.

As described above, in a gaming machine in which the touch operation effect and the movable accessory member actuation effect are executed, the touch operation effect may be executed due to an erroneous detection due to the actuation of the movable accessory member 39 .

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (at the stage when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the movable accessory member From the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position immediately before the operation of 39A is started) to the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position after the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), Touch operation detection by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E have different detection ranges, and the presence or absence of an object is individually detected in each detection range. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the execution of the touch operation effect can be restricted, and of course the movable accessory member 39 is on standby. It is also possible to restrict execution of the touch operation effect until returning to the position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the touch operation effect is executed. can be prevented.

By the way, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position, the player can visually recognize the left side area of the pattern display section 341 and the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, when a touch operation is performed on the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, Then, an alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left area of the pattern display portion 341 . As a result, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4 can be effectively used to execute the (alternative) touch operation performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be.

Note that the alternative touch operation effect may be such that an image to be displayed in the central area of the pattern display portion 341 as the touch operation effect is displayed in the left area of the pattern display portion 341, and is completely different from the touch operation effect. An image may be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a sub-display device in the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, the sub-display device receives a touch operation, and the sub-display device displays a touch effect or an alternative touch operation. A production may be executed. In this case, even if the movable accessory member 39 is in operation, execution of the touch effect on the sub-display is not restricted. Furthermore, the sub-display may be provided on a movable accessory member that is movable (for example, in the left-right direction) in the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B are not confirmed, so that the objects are detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. Execution of the touch operation effect is restricted due to the presence, but by ignoring the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B when the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B detect objects. Execution of the touch operation effect due to the presence may be restricted.

Also, in this embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position, the presence of the object is detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B and the sub-detection sensor 38E, while the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position. If the object does not exist, the presence of the object is detected only by the sub-detection sensor 38E. It is also conceivable to detect the presence of objects. For example, even if some of the two main detection sensors 38A, 38B and one sub-detection sensor 38E are out of order, the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order may detect the presence of an object. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the main power supply of the game machine 10 is turned on, the movable accessory member 39 is individually detected by each of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub-detection sensor 38E. is in the operating position, it is possible to check whether each detection sensor 38A, 38B, 38E is out of order.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to understand the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A0]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of one of the first effect and the second effect in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A0, execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, there is an inconvenience that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that it is based on the action of the player. can be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix A1]
The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the first effect in the overlapping period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period, so that the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. It is possible to prevent execution of the detection effect due to this.

[Appendix A2]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) to when the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. 38d), when the presence of an object is detected, the gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted. can be prevented from running.

[Appendix A3]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) to when the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. 38d) restricts the execution of the process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection means in the specific period, so the simple process It is possible to prevent execution of the detection effect due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix A4]
further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position,
The effect limiting means starts limiting execution of the first effect during a period from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is activated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A5]
Detecting that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position when the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. Further comprising return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A6]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The performance executing means (51) shifts the second performance to the special game state in the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second performance overlap. When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the case of executing as an effect (jackpot confirmation effect, one-shot notification effect) that clearly indicates that the object is a thing, the predetermined area The gaming machine according to appendix A0, characterized in that the type of game effect is executed according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected in the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected when executing an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special game state in the overlapping period, the presence of the object in the predetermined area A type of game effect is executed according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect throughout the entire game effect in a situation where the excitement of the game is likely to be lost. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game and enhances the interest in the game. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the player to lose interest in the game, it is possible to execute the first effect as planned, so that the first effect can be prevented from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix A7]
The effect execution means (51), when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected The gaming machine according to appendix A6, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix A8]
The game effect includes an information game effect (variable game effect) executed in an information game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The information game production includes a basic production (high-speed fluctuation production) executed from the start of the information game, a first development production (normal ready-to-win production) that can be executed after the basic production ends, and the first development production. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The effect restricting means, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlap period, and the second development effect is being executed, the effect of the first effect is reduced. restrict the execution of
The effect executing means (51)
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, further comprising specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect when the effect restricting means restricts execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machines according to notes A7 and A8, an effect corresponding to the type of game effect being executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means during the overlapping period is executed. For example, if the game effect executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A9]
When the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the overlap period, the first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first advanced effect. , the gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, even if the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means during the overlapping period, the first effect is executed when the basic effect or the first advanced effect is being executed. A first effect is executed by the means. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to arouse excitement even when the low-expectation performance is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, etc., the first performance is executed as planned, thereby enabling the game to be played. It is possible to prevent the first performance from being meaningless while preventing the interest from being lost.

[Appendix A10]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) during which an effect (touch operation reception effect) is executed to indicate to the player that it is the predetermined period,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by means of the effect limiting means when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the first predetermined period. is restricted, and a specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restriction means, and the specified A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect). be. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A11]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) during which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for indicating to the player that it is the predetermined period is not executed,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) during the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A6 to A10.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum A11, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means during the overlapping period, the first effect is executed during the second predetermined period. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to arouse interest even if the low-expectation-level performance is executed, even if an object is detected during the second predetermined period due to the actuation of the movable accessory member, the first performance can be executed as planned. , it is possible to prevent the first performance from being meaningless while preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

[Appendix A12]
The specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A6 to A11 characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the movable accessory member is activated, To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A13]
Any one of appendices A6 to A12, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated is more effectively aroused than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is prevented, and interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A14]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix A15]
a second image display means (391B) different from the image display means (341);
A second movable device that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second actuation position) by the effect execution means (51) and provided with the second image display means (391B) Accessory member (39B);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
further comprising
When the movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B) detected and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B) ) and is not detected by
Said first effect executing means controls said image display means (341 ) to execute the first effect (touch operation effect),
The effect restricting means does not limit the execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted by the effect limiting means in the second overlap period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period for executing the first effect and the second predetermined period overlap with the execution period of the second effect, the first effect is unnecessarily executed by the second image display means. is prevented from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the first effect from being extremely lowered, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A16]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38A , 38B) detects the presence of an object, the gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, execution of the first effect during the specific period is restricted. can be prevented.

[Appendix A17]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38A , 38B) restricts execution of processing for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted, so that an erroneous detection can be made by a simple process. can prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A18]
Further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position,
The effect executing means (51) restricts the execution of the first effect from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) until the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A17, characterized in that the game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is activated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A19]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further comprising return detection means (39b) for detecting that
The effect restricting means cancels the restriction on execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A18, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the image when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A19, wherein the coverage is greater than the coverage of the display means (341).

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A20, wherein the movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game presentation.

[Appendix A22]
Further comprising second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341),
The effect executing means (51)
When execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means (381B, 392C). The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising specific effect execution means for causing the game machine to play.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, when execution of the first effect on the image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, the specific effect execution means displays a specific effect different from the first effect on the second image display means. is executed. This specific effect is executed in the second image display means by detecting the existence of the object in the predetermined area by the detection means based on the operation of the movable accessory member during the overlapping period. In other words, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. Accordingly, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, not only is it possible to restrict the execution of the first effect, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game compared to the case where the game is played.

Further, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the image display means where the first effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect. It is possible to draw attention not only to what type (expectation level) of the effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix A23]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific performance is characterized by having a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first performance. The gaming machine according to appendix A22.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A24]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to appendix A22 or appendix A23, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated is more effectively aroused than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is prevented, and interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A25]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A25, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A25, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix A27]
a second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A26, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to appendices A26 and A27, a specific effect is executed on the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. be. As a result, when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period of time causing an erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. As compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix A28]
a second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
further comprising
The first effect execution means is configured to display the second image display means when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). (391B) to execute the first production,
The effect limiting means limits execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) in a second overlap period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap,
The effect execution means (51) displays the first effect on the third image display means (392B) when restricting execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) in the second overlap period. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

[Appendix A29]
It further comprises a second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and that is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B). The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to notes A28 and A29, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means during the second overlap period, instead of executing the first effect by the second image display means , a specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the third image display means. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect performs the specific effect. It is possible to draw attention not only to whether the (expectation level) effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. Further, by executing the specific effect in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case where the game is played, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix A30]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. A gaming machine according to appendix A28 or appendix A29 characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A31]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Any one of appendices A28 to A30, characterized in that the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A31, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated is more effectively aroused than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is prevented, and interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A32]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A31, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix A33]
a second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
further comprising
The effect executing means (51) replaces the first effect with the first effect when the effect restricting means restricts execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) in the overlapping period. The second image display means (381B) is caused to execute a first specific effect indicating that it is the predetermined period, and when an object is detected in the specific area during the predetermined period, the third image display means (392C) The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect.

[Appendix A34]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B),
The gaming machine according to appendix A33, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34, when the performance limiting means restricts execution of the first effect by the image display means in the overlapping period, the first specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first effect. Then, on condition that the existence of the object in the specific area is detected, the third image display means executes the first effect and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. Further, when the movable accessory member is at the first position during the overlap period, the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the second specific effect are executed. By combining the 2 specific effects, the interest in the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix A35]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The second specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A33 or appendix A34, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35, since the degree of expectation for the second specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game in , and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A36]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Said second specific effect, the game according to appendix A33 or appendix A34, characterized in that the determination result of the determination means (41) is a confirmation effect that indicates that the transition to the special game state. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36, since the second specific effect is a fixed effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A37]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the second specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix A38]
The movable accessory member (39) is movable between the first position and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position,
The game machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means enables execution of the first effect when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A38, execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period of time, while the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is at the intermediate position. execution is not restricted. Therefore, the operation of the movable accessory member can be prevented from being erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the execution of the first effect can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first performance from being unnecessarily restricted in the case of .

[Appendix A39]
The effect executing means (51), when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38) when the movable accessory member is at the second position during the predetermined period, The gaming machine according to appendix A38, further comprising specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the 1 effect.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A39, when the object detection means detects the existence of the object in the predetermined area when the movable accessory member is in the second position for the predetermined period, the specific effect execution means performs the first effect. A specific performance different from is executed. In other words, the specific effect is executed using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. Thus, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, not only is it possible to restrict the execution of the first effect, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game as compared with the case where it is played.

[Appendix A40]
The movable accessory member (39) further comprises a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A39, wherein the specific effect execution means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect is to be executed, but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what type (expectation) of the effect is executed, but also in which image display means the effect is executed. It can also be noted that As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix A41]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific performance is characterized by having a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first performance. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39 or Supplementary Note A40.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A41, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the first movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game in , and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix A42]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to appendix A39 or appendix A40, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the excitement for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A43]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix A42, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (38)
not detecting the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position;
Supplementary notes A38 to A43 characterized by detecting that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the existence of an object is detected by the detection means for a predetermined period while preventing execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position. When detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix A45]
In a specific period from when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member (39) to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position, The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein the execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A45, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect during the specific period is restricted. can be prevented.

[Appendix A46]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38 ) restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the above method.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted. can prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A47]
further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The performance limiting means operates the driving means (39a) after it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix A45 or appendix A46, wherein the restriction on the execution of the first effect is started until the drive of is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A48]
Detecting that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position when the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. Further comprising return detection means (39b),
The effect restricting means cancels the restriction on execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix A45 or appendix A46, characterized in that

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A48, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the second effect in the overlapping period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A49, since the execution of the second effect can be restricted for a predetermined period of time, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. Unnecessary execution of the first effect due to this can be prevented.

[Appendix A50]
The game according to Supplementary Note A49, wherein the effect restricting means limits the execution of the process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A50, even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix A51]
When the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect executing means causes the second effect to be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A50.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51, wherein the point in time at which the certain period of time has elapsed is the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has ended.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51 or appendix A52, wherein the point in time at which the certain period of time has elapsed is the point in time at which the first effect ends when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to notes A51 to A53, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when the predetermined period has passed since the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an operation to the image display means has been performed due to the operation of the movable accessory member, and at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. By executing the second effect, which is generally performed as a highly anticipated effect, after the end of the game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein the effect executing means (51) restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A54, by limiting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be limited. It is possible to prevent execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix A55]
The first effect is a normal effect with a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) is lower than the normal effect, and the determining means (41) ) Including a rare effect (premium effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in the above is to shift to the special game state,
The second effect executing means causes the first effect means to perform the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation receiving period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special game state based on the determination result by forcibly operating the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period elapses. Executed as a production to clarify something,
The first effect execution means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forced actuation of the movable accessory member (39), and the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the existence of the object as the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, characterized in that the rare effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A55, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced activation time elapses. is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly actuated before the predetermined time elapses. Such forced actuation of the movable accessory member, which the player does not expect, can surprise and shock the player, thereby enhancing the interest and amusement of the game. Further, by executing the detection effect by utilizing the erroneous detection due to the forced actuation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to make the player see the first effect without fail. In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix A55, a rare effect is executed as the first effect, which clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to a special game state. By being executed, when a rarely seen rare performance is determined as a detection performance, not only can the rare performance be surely shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member can be obtained. By executing the rarity effect in addition to the operation of , it is possible to further surprise and shock the player. As a result, the interest and amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

[Appendix A56]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state between an information game state in which an information game for notifying the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and
The information game state includes a first information game state and a second information game state having a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state by the determination means (41) than the first information game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first information game state after the end of the first special game, shifts to the second information game state after the end of the second special game,
The rarity effect indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix A55, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56, the rare effect is a effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means is to shift to the (second) special game state ((probability variable) jackpot game state). That is, the rarity effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the (second) special game state ((probability variable) jackpot game state) is to be shifted to due to an erroneous detection due to the forced actuation of the movable accessory member. As a result, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous before the end of the notification game when the rare effect is executed after the forced actuation of the movable accessory member. can be improved.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to appendix A55 or appendix A56, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57, when the first effect is not the rare effect, execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A58]
The detection means (38a to 38d) further comprising a second movable accessory member (39B) not detected by
The second effect execution means executes a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) of moving the second movable accessory member (39B) between the third position and the fourth position,
The effect limiting means can limit execution of the second effect by the movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect executing means in the overlapping period, and the second movable accessory member ( 39B), the gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the execution of the second effect is not restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A58, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted for a predetermined period of time, the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is displayed based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an operation has been performed by the player.

Also, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, the operation of the second movable accessory member does not cause an erroneous detection by the detection means, so it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member, which does not cause an erroneous detection, from being unnecessarily restricted. . As a result, the execution of the movable accessory presentation is prevented from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the presentation from being monotonous and suppressing the decrease in interest and amusement in the game.

[Appendix A59]
When the performance limiting means determines that it is time to start the second performance by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the performance restriction means restricts the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to appendix A58, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A59, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is performed. By limiting the execution, it is possible to limit the execution of the first movable accessory performance for a predetermined period of time, so it is possible to prevent the execution of the first performance due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A60]
When the timing for starting the first movable accessory presentation is the predetermined period, the presentation restricting means, when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, causes the first movable accessory member to perform the second The gaming machine according to appendix A59, characterized by executing an effect.

[Appendix A61]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has passed is the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has ended.

[Appendix A62]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the time point at which the certain period of time has elapsed is the time point at which the first effect ends when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to notes A60 to A62, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, when the predetermined period has passed since the start of the predetermined period, the second A second effect is executed by one movable accessory member. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the first movable accessory member, when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first After the performance is finished, the second performance by the first movable accessory member, which is generally performed as a highly anticipated performance, is executed, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A63]
The effect restricting means restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. can be restricted, it is possible to prevent execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix A64]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A63, wherein the coverage is greater than the coverage of the image display means (341).

[Appendix A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A64, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game presentation. .

[Appendix A66]
The effect limiting means can limit execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, and when the execution period starts earlier than the overlapping period The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein execution of the first effect can be restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A66, the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member by restricting the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period. False detection by the means is prevented, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, so that the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the detection means from erroneously detecting the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the movable accessary member is operated regardless of whether the predetermined period starts first or the execution period starts first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on the erroneous detection, and to prevent unnecessary execution of the detection effect based on the erroneous detection.

[Appendix B1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Judgment means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the judgment condition;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
with
An effect ( when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area, the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected. A game machine characterized by executing the game performance of a type according to the situation of the case.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected when executing an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special game state in the overlapping period, the presence of the object in the predetermined area A type of game effect is executed according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect throughout the entire game effect in a situation where the excitement of the game is likely to be lost. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game and enhances the interest in the game. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the player to lose interest in the game, it is possible to execute the first effect as planned, so that the first effect can be prevented from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix B2]
The effect execution means (51), when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected The gaming machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix B3]
The game effect includes an information game effect (variable game effect) executed in an information game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The information game production includes a basic production (high-speed fluctuation production) executed from the start of the information game, a first development production (normal ready-to-win production) that can be executed after the basic production ends, and the first development production. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The effect executing means (51)
Effect restriction for limiting execution of the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlap period and the second development effect is being executed. means and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect when the effect restricting means restricts execution of the first effect;
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, further comprising:

In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes B2 and B3, an effect corresponding to the type of game effect being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlapping period is executed. For example, if the game effect executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix B4]
When the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the overlap period, the first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first advanced effect. , the gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, even if the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means during the overlapping period, the first effect is executed when the basic effect or the first advanced effect is being executed. A first effect is executed by the means. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to arouse excitement even when the low-expectation performance is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, etc., the first performance is executed as planned, thereby enabling the game to be played. It is possible to prevent the first performance from being meaningless while preventing the interest from being lost.

[Appendix B5]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) during which an effect (touch operation reception effect) is executed to indicate to the player that it is the predetermined period,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by means of the effect limiting means when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the first predetermined period. is restricted, and a specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect, and the specific A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect). be. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix B6]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) during which an effect (touch operation reception effect) for indicating to the player that it is the predetermined period is not executed,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) during the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B5.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B6, even if the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlapping period, the first effect is executed during the second predetermined period. Therefore, at a timing when it is difficult to arouse interest even if the low-expectation-level performance is executed, even if an object is detected during the second predetermined period due to the actuation of the movable accessory member, the first performance can be executed as planned. , it is possible to prevent the first performance from being meaningless while preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

[Appendix B7]
The specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B7, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the movable accessory member is activated, To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix B8]
According to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated is more effectively aroused than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is prevented, and interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix B9]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Judgment means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the judgment condition;
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state between an information game state in which an information game for notifying the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation accepting period). ,
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position during the predetermined period, the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special game state. When the expectation level improvement effect (chance up effect) for improving the expectation level of is executed, the movable accessory is detected in the predetermined area by the detection means (38a to 38d) by executing the expectation level improvement effect. A game characterized in that, when the presence of a member is detected, it is possible to execute a fixed effect indicating that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the presence of the movable accessory member in the predetermined area is detected by executing the expectation level improvement presentation in which the movable accessory member operates, it is possible to execute the fixed presentation. is. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detecting means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, even if it is erroneously detected as being caused by the action of the player, The definite effect is executed using the false detection. In other words, the problem that the excitement may occur due to the execution of the first performance with a low expectation of shifting to the special game state after the operation of the movable accessory member is solved by utilizing the false detection as an advantage. be able to.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) executes the fixed effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period and a predetermined effect is being executed. The game machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that

[Appendix C3]
The game effect includes an information game effect (variable game effect) executed in an information game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The information game production includes a basic production (high-speed fluctuation production) executed from the start of the information game, a first development production (normal ready-to-win production) that can be executed after the basic production ends, and the first development production. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the predetermined effect is the second development effect.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C2 and C3, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined effect (for example, a second development effect) is being executed, a fixed effect is executed. can be That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the actuation of the movable accessory member, the fixed effect can be executed during the execution of the predetermined effect such as the second development effect. Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix C4]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) during which an effect (touch operation reception effect) is executed to indicate to the player that it is the predetermined period,
The effect executing means (51) can cause the fixed effect to be executed when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the first predetermined period (during execution of the acceptance effect), the confirmation effect can be executed. That is, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means by the actuation of the movable accessory member, the fixed effect can be executed during the first predetermined period (while the reception effect is being executed). Therefore, as the first effect, even if a low-expectation-level effect is determined that can hardly be expected to result in a shift to the special game state as a result of the determination, the low-expectation-level effect is executed after the movable accessory member is activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix C5]
The fixed effect is a effect executed after the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position, and the movable accessory member (39) moves from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C4, wherein the effect (fixed effect B) is accompanied by movement.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, after the operation of the movable accessory member is completed, the effect accompanying the operation of the movable accessory is executed again as the fixed effect. That is, the fixed effect is executed as the second operating effect of the movable accessory member operating effect which is continuously executed. Therefore, the fixed effect is executed as an unexpected effect. Also, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member is operated again after the return of the movable accessory member. As a result, the player can continue to be interested in the performance even after the performance of the movable accessory member is finished, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C6]
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and
The effect executing means (51) is configured to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the above-mentioned When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) triggered by being moved to the second position, the determination result of the determination means (41) is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, characterized in that the fixed effect is executed on condition that the game is shifted to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, the confirmation effect is executed on the condition that the determination result is to shift to the second special game state in which the second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. be done. For example, the determination result is shifted to a second special game state in which the probability of being determined by the determination means to shift to the special game state is higher than that of the first information game is shifted to the second information game after the special game is completed. Confirmation production is executed on the condition that it is. Therefore, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the actuation of the movable accessory member, the determination result is higher than the first special game state when the final effect is executed. Since the player can know that the second special game state is to be transferred to the second special game state which is advantageous to the player, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C6, wherein the fixed effect is the scarcity fixed effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, since the fixed effect is the rare fixed effect, it is easy to know that the determination result is to shift to the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
a first image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which decorative patterns (main patterns) are displayed in a variable manner;
a second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
a first movable accessory member (39A) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position);
a second movable accessory member (39B) moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and provided with the second image display means (391B);
first detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (341);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A , 38B) but not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A , 38B), and
The effect executing means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), and when the presence of the object is detected during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period) a first effect execution means for causing the first image display means (341) to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D); ,
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the first movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In a first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the an effect limiting means that does not limit the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) in a second overlap period that overlaps with the execution period of the second effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect limiting means in the first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. be done. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the action of the player. It is possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring. On the other hand, the effect limiting means does not limit the execution of the first effect and the second effect in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period (the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period) for executing the first effect overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the second image display means is displayed unnecessarily. The execution of the first performance to be executed is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the first effect from being extremely lowered, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix D2]
In a specific period from when it is determined to operate the first movable role product member (39A) to when the first movable role product member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting means The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the execution of the first effect is restricted when the existence of the object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, even if the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means, execution of the first effect during the specific period is restricted. You can prevent it from running.

[Appendix D3]
In a specific period from when it is determined to operate the first movable role product member (39A) to when the first movable role product member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting means The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein execution of processing for confirming whether or not presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted. It is possible to prevent execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix D4]
Further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the first movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position,
The effect executing means (51) restricts the execution of the first effect from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) until the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, characterized in that the game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the first movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D5]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) returns from the second position to the first position. Further comprising return detection means (39b) for detecting that
The effect limiting means limits execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the first movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the is released.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the restriction on execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the first movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D6]
The coverage of the first image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is that the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D5, characterized in that the coverage ratio for the first image display means (341) is greater than the coverage ratio for the first image display means (341) in the case.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments D1 to D6, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game presentation. .

[Appendix E1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
a first image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which decorative patterns (main patterns) are displayed in a variable manner;
second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341);
detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for detecting an object when it exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) sensed by movable accessory members (39A, 39C);
effect execution means (51) for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B, 392C) and the movable accessory members (39A, 39C) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
A first effect ( a first effect execution means for executing a touch operation effect);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39, 39C) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
When execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means, a specific effect different from the first effect is displayed on the second image display means (381B, 392C). a specific effect executing means for executing a
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, there is an inconvenience that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that it is based on the action of the player. can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect limiting means in the overlapping period, the specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means by the specific effect executing means. . This specific effect is executed in the second image display means by detecting the existence of the object in the predetermined area by the detection means based on the operation of the movable accessory member during the overlapping period. In other words, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. Accordingly, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, not only is it possible to restrict the execution of the first effect, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game compared to the case where the game is played.

Further, the specific effect is executed not by the first image display means on which the first effect is to be executed but by the second image display means, whereby the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect. Therefore, attention can be paid not only to what type (expectation) of the effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix E2]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific performance is characterized by having a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first performance. The gaming machine according to appendix E1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the first movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game in , and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix E3]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, since the specific effect is a fixed effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the first movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix E4]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, the excitement for the game after the first movable accessory member is activated is further aroused. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the first movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix E6]
a second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machine according to appendices E5 and E6, a specific effect is executed on the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. be. As a result, when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period of time causing an erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. As compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix F1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
a first image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which decorative patterns (main patterns) are displayed in a variable manner;
a second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
first detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) are moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and are moved between the first position and the second position. A movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Effect execution for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game. means (51);
with
The effect executing means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first image display means (341) displays a first effect. and when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the second image display means (391B) a first effect executing means for executing one effect;
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In a first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted, and the second predetermined period and the effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) in a second overlapping period overlapping with the execution period of the second effect;
When limiting the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) in the second overlap period, the third image display means (392B) is caused to execute a specific effect different from the first effect. a specific effect executing means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix F2]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and that is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes F1 and F2, the performance limiting means can limit the execution of the first effect on the first image display means in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. is. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the inconvenience is that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that it is based on the action of the player. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means during the second overlap period, instead of executing the first effect by the second image display means, the third image display means is used to display the first effect. A specific effect different from the effect is executed. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect performs the specific effect. It is possible to draw attention not only to whether the (expectation level) effect is executed, but also to which image display means the effect is executed. Further, by executing the specific effect in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case where the game is played, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

[Appendix F3]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. A gaming machine according to appendix F1 or appendix F2 characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect. To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix F4]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Any one of notes F1 to F3, characterized in that the specific effect is a definite effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, since the specific effect is the fixed effect, the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated is more effectively aroused than when the first effect is executed as planned. This is prevented, and interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix F5]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix F4, wherein the specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
a first image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which decorative patterns (main patterns) are displayed in a variable manner;
a second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
first detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
When it is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position), the first detection means ( 38A, 38B) is detected by the movable accessory member (39A),
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Effect execution for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game. means (51);
with
The effect executing means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) for a predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first image display means (341) displays a first effect (touch operation effect). a first effect executing means for executing
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
When the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period, the second image display means (381B) replaces the first effect. When an object is detected in the specific area during the predetermined period, the third image display means (392C) is caused to perform the first specific effect and the first specific effect. a specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect different from the effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix G2]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and that is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided. prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

In the gaming machines according to notes G1 and G2, the performance limiting means restricts execution of the first effect on the first image display means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, the inconvenience is that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that it is based on the action of the player. can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted in the overlapping period by the effect limiting means, the first specific effect is executed on the second image display means in place of the first effect, and the specific effect is performed. A second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect is executed by the third image display means on condition that the presence of the object in the area is detected. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. Further, when the movable accessory member is at the first position during the overlap period, the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the second specific effect are executed. By combining the 2 specific effects, the interest in the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix G3]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The second specific effect has a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, since the degree of expectation for the second specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the operation of the movable accessory member To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game in , and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix G4]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Said second specific effect, the game according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, characterized in that the determination result of the determination means (41) is a confirmation effect that indicates that the transition to the special game state. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, since the second specific effect is a fixed effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix G5]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix G4, wherein the second specific effect is the scarcity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix H1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
a first position (standby position), a second position (operating position), and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and between the first position and the second position; a movable accessory member (39) detected by the detection means (38a-38d) when moved between;
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
A second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) of moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the second position, the first position, and the second position. a performance execution means;
During the predetermined period, the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member (39) is at the second position, and the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member (39) is at the intermediate position. production limiting means for enabling execution of one production;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period of time, while the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is at the intermediate position. execution is not restricted. Therefore, the operation of the movable accessory member can be prevented from being erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and the execution of the first effect can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first performance from being unnecessarily restricted in the case of .

[Appendix H2]
The effect executing means (51), when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38) when the movable accessory member is at the second position during the predetermined period, The gaming machine according to appendix H1, further comprising specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the 1 effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, when the object detection means detects the existence of the object in the predetermined area when the movable accessory member is in the second position for the predetermined period, the specific effect execution means performs the first effect. A specific performance different from is executed. In other words, the specific effect is executed using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. Thus, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, not only is it possible to restrict the execution of the first effect, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game as compared with the case where it is played.

[Appendix H3]
The movable accessory member (39) further comprises a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H3, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect is to be executed, but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what type (expectation) of the effect is executed, but also in which image display means the effect is executed. It can also be noted that As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix H4]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific performance is characterized by having a relatively high degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state as compared with the first performance. The gaming machine according to appendix H2 or appendix H3.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4, since the degree of expectation for the specific effect is relatively higher than that for the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, after the movable accessory member is activated, To effectively prevent the loss of interest in a game and to effectively improve the interest in the game.

[Appendix H5]
Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to appendix H2 or appendix H3, wherein the specific effect is a definite effect indicating that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5, since the specific effect is a fixed effect, it is more effective to arouse the interest in the game after the first movable accessory member is activated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix H6]
The fixed effect includes a normal fixed effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premium effect) having a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal fixed effect. ) and
The gaming machine according to appendix H5, wherein the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, since the specific effect is the rarity confirmation effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as planned, the excitement for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further aroused. This is effectively prevented, and the interest in the game is further effectively improved.

[Appendix H7]
The detection means (38)
not detecting the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position;
Supplementary notes H1 to H6 characterized by detecting the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39) is at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, the presence of an object is detected by the detection means for a predetermined period of time while preventing execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position. When detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix H8]
In a specific period from when it is decided to operate the movable accessory member (39) to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position, The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect is restricted during the specific period. can be prevented.

[Appendix H9]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38 ) restricts the execution of the process for confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the method according to appendix H1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted. can prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix H10]
further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The performance limiting means operates the driving means (39a) after it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix H8 or appendix H9, wherein the restriction on the execution of the first effect is started until the drive of is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, execution of the first effect is restricted from immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H11]
Detecting that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position when the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. Further comprising return detection means (39b),
The effect restricting means cancels the restriction on execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix H8 or appendix H9, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix I1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of the second effect in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, since the execution of the second effect can be restricted for a predetermined period of time, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. Unnecessary execution of the first effect due to this can be prevented.

[Appendix I2]
The game according to Supplementary Note I1, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the execution of the process for starting the second effect is restricted, thereby preventing the second effect from occurring in the predetermined period. can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix I3]
When the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect executing means causes the second effect to be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. A gaming machine according to appendix I2.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has elapsed is the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has ended.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note I3 or supplementary note I4, wherein the time point at which the certain period of time has elapsed is the time point at which the first effect is completed when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to notes I3 to I5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when the predetermined period has passed since the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an operation to the image display means has been performed due to the operation of the movable accessory member, and at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. By executing the second effect, which is generally performed as a highly anticipated effect, after the end of the game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix I6]
The game machine according to appendix I1, wherein the effect executing means (51) restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I6, by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect during the predetermined period, the execution of the second effect during the predetermined period can be restricted. It is possible to prevent execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix J1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of the determination condition;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
with
The first effect is a normal effect with a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) is lower than the normal effect, and the determining means (41) ) Including a rare effect (premium effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in the above is to shift to the special game state,
The second effect executing means causes the first effect means to perform the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation receiving period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special game state based on the determination result by forcibly operating the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period elapses. Executed as a production to clarify something,
The first effect execution means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forced actuation of the movable accessory member (39), and the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the existence of the object as the first effect. A game machine characterized by executing the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced activation time elapses. is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly actuated before the predetermined time elapses. Such forced actuation of the movable accessory member, which the player does not expect, can surprise and shock the player, thereby enhancing the interest and amusement of the game. Further, by executing the detection effect by utilizing the erroneous detection due to the forced actuation of the movable accessory member, it is possible to make the player see the first effect without fail. In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix J1, as the first effect, a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to a special game state is executed, so the rare effect is performed due to an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. By being executed, when a rarely seen rare performance is determined as a detection performance, not only can the rare performance be surely shown to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member can be obtained. By executing the rarity effect in addition to the operation of , it is possible to further surprise and shock the player. As a result, the interest and amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

[Appendix J2]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state between an information game state in which an information game for notifying the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the first special game is executed, and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and
The information game state includes a first information game state and a second information game state having a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state by the determination means (41) than the first information game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first information game state after the end of the first special game, shifts to the second information game state after the end of the second special game,
The rarity effect indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the end of the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J2, the rare effect is a effect that indicates that the determination result of the determination means is to shift to the (second) special game state ((probability variable) jackpot game state). That is, the rarity effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the (second) special game state ((probability variable) jackpot game state) is to be shifted to due to an erroneous detection due to the forced actuation of the movable accessory member. As a result, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous before the end of the notification game when the rare effect is executed after the forced actuation of the movable accessory member. can be improved.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine according to appendix J1 or appendix J2, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J3, when the first effect is not the rare effect, execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detection means (38a to 38d) the first movable accessory member (39A) detected by;
The detection means (38a to 38d), a second movable accessory member (39B) not detected by
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
The first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position and the second position, or the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position and the fourth position. A second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) to move between
In an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect executing means can be restricted. a performance limiting means that does not limit execution of the second performance by the second movable accessory member (39B);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted for a predetermined period of time, the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is displayed based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an operation has been performed by the player.

Also, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, the operation of the second movable accessory member does not cause an erroneous detection by the detection means, so it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member, which does not cause an erroneous detection, from being unnecessarily restricted. . As a result, the execution of the movable accessory presentation is prevented from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the presentation from being monotonous and suppressing the decrease in interest and amusement in the game.

[Appendix K2]
When the performance limiting means determines that it is time to start the second performance by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the performance restriction means restricts the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The game machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is performed. By limiting the execution, it is possible to limit the execution of the first movable accessory performance for a predetermined period of time, so it is possible to prevent the execution of the first performance due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K3]
When the timing for starting the first movable accessory presentation is the predetermined period, the presentation restricting means, when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, causes the first movable accessory member to perform the second The gaming machine according to appendix K2, characterized by executing an effect.

[Appendix K4]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has passed is the point in time at which the predetermined period of time has ended.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the point in time at which the certain period of time has elapsed is the point in time at which the first effect ends when the first effect is executed.

In the gaming machine according to notes K3 to K5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the second effect is performed when the predetermined period has passed since the start of the predetermined period. A second effect is executed by one movable accessory member. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the image display means has been operated by the operation of the first movable accessory member, when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first After the performance is finished, the second performance by the first movable accessory member, which is generally performed as a highly anticipated performance, is executed, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix K6]
The effect limiting means according to Supplementary Note K1, wherein the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member during the predetermined period is restricted. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. can be restricted, it is possible to prevent execution of the first effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix K7]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K6, wherein the coverage is greater than the coverage of the image display means (341).

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K7, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game presentation. .

[Appendix L1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is moved between the first position and the second position. a movable accessory member (39) to be
effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
with
The effect executing means (51)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
effect limiting means for limiting execution of one of the first effect and the second effect in an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap;
The effect limiting means can limit execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period, and the execution period starts earlier than the overlapping period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect when the game is played.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L1, the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member by restricting the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts earlier than the overlapping period. False detection by the means is prevented, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, so that the object is placed in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the detection means from erroneously detecting the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the movable accessary member is operated regardless of whether the predetermined period starts first or the execution period starts first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on the erroneous detection, and to prevent unnecessary execution of the detection effect based on the erroneous detection.

[Appendix L2]
The effect restricting means controls the detection means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) to when the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. 38d), the execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L2, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted. can be prevented from running.

[Appendix L3]
The effect restricting means controls the detecting means (38a to 38d) restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L3, by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection means in the specific period, the execution of the detection effect in the overlapping period can be restricted. It is possible to prevent execution of the detection effect due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix L4]
further comprising driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position,
The effect limiting means starts limiting execution of the first effect during a period from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L4, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L5]
Detecting that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the first position to the second position when the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. Further comprising return detection means (39b),
The effect limiting means cancels the restriction on execution of the first effect when the return detection means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L5, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L6]
Any of supplementary notes L1 to L5, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to note L6, even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the execution of the second effect due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix L7]
The game according to any one of appendices L1 to L5, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the movable accessory effect in the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L7, by restricting the execution of the processing for confirming whether or not it is time to start the movable accessory presentation during the acceptance period, the execution of the movable accessory presentation during the acceptance period can be restricted. It is possible to prevent execution of the detection effect due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix M1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
an image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed;
first detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting an object when the object exists in a first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when an object exists in a second predetermined area at least partially different from the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) )When,
An object exists in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area based on both the detection results of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the detection results of the second detection means (38C, 38D). a first judgment means (51) for judging whether to
second determining means for determining whether an object exists based on one of said first detecting means (38A, 38B) and said second detecting means (38C, 38D) when a specific condition is met; (51) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, the presence of an object is determined by the first determining means based on the detection results of both the first detecting means and the second detecting means. Whether or not the object exists is determined by the second determination means based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, even if a problem may occur by referring to the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, it is possible to detect the object based on one of the detection means. By judging the presence, it is possible to appropriately judge whether or not the object exists while preventing the occurrence of defects.

[Appendix M2]
Further comprising a movable accessory member (39) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) set in the first predetermined area,
The first determination means (51) determines the first detection means (38C, 38D) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when the movable accessory member (39) is at the first position. determining whether an object is detected in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area based on the
The second determination means (51) determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the movable accessory member (39) is at the second position, based on the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to appendix M1, wherein it is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined area.

[Appendix M3]
The movable accessory member (39) is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) when moved between the first position and the second position, and the second detection means (38C, 38D), the gaming machine of Appendix M2.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M3, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the presence or absence of the object in the first predetermined area is not determined based on the first detection means, and the presence or absence of the object is not determined based on the second detection means. It is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player when the movable accessory member is at the second position. Also, even when the movable accessory member is operating, it can be determined whether or not the player has touched the second predetermined area. Thereby, it is possible to execute a touch effect based on the player's touch operation outside the operation area of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix M4]
The movable accessory member (39) is moved between the first position and the second position by the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to appendix M2, characterized by being detected.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M4, for example, even if one of the first detection means and the second detection means fails while a game is in progress, it is possible to detect that the movable accessory member is at the second position. . Also, when checking the operation of the movable accessory member when the main power supply of the game machine is turned on, it is checked whether the movable accessory member is at the second position only by the detection result of the first detection means. , Conversely, by checking that the movable accessory member is at the second position only based on the detection result of the second detection means, it is checked whether the first detection means and the second detection means are out of order. is also possible.

[Appendix M5]
Further comprising an effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game,
The effect executing means (51)
A first production (touch operation production, alternative touch operation production) triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the presence of an object in the second predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). a first effect executing means for executing
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member actuation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In an overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area can be restricted, and the second predetermined effect is performed. an effect limiting means that enables execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the area;
The gaming machine according to appendix M3, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M5, the object is placed in the first predetermined area during the execution period of the second effect by the movable accessory member detected by the first detection means when moved between the first position and the second position. The execution of the first performance triggered by the presence of is restricted by the performance limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the detection effect due to the erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is the touch operation performed by the player. On the other hand, when an object exists in the second predetermined area outside the detection range of the first detection means, even during the execution period of the second effect, when the presence of the object is detected by the second detection means, the 1 performance is executed without restriction. Therefore, unnecessary execution of the first effect can be prevented, and an extreme decrease in the execution frequency of the first effect can be suppressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix M6]
The effect restricting means restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) during the overlap period. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M6, the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted by not executing the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the first detecting means in the overlapping period. It is possible to prevent execution of the detection effect due to erroneous detection by such processing.

[Appendix M7]
Supplementary note M6, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect when the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) in the overlapping period. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M7, even if the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, execution of the first effect during the specific period is restricted. can be prevented from running.

[Appendix M8]
The first effect executing means, in the overlapping period, when the presence of an object in the second predetermined area is detected by the second detecting means (38C, 38D), the first effect is executed by the image display means ( 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices M5 to M7, wherein the gaming machine is executed in an area corresponding to the second predetermined area in 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M8, since it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the image display means from being restricted, the execution of the first effect by other means of effect (for example, a speaker or a lamp) is restricted. Compared to , it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M9]
Further comprising a second image display means (391B) arranged at a position corresponding to the second predetermined area and different from the first image display means (341),
The first effect execution means limits the execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined region in the overlapping period by the effect limiting means, the second effect executing means limits the execution of the first effect in the second predetermined region. Any one of appendices M5 to M8, characterized in that when the second detection means (38C, 38D) detects the presence of an object, the first effect is executed by the second image display means. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M9, when the second image display means is provided, it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the second image display means from being restricted. As compared with the case where the execution of the first performance is restricted at , it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of interest due to the restriction of the execution of the first performance.

[Appendix M10]
The specific condition is that the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area is detected by one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M9, wherein the gaming machine is in a state in which it cannot be played.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M10, if the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order, the second determination means determines whether the object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. It is determined whether or not Therefore, even if the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order, it is possible to determine whether the presence of an object, for example, a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is performed by the detection means that is not out of order. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix M11]
Any one of appendices M1 to M10, wherein the specific condition is that the operation check of the first detection means (38A, 38B) or the second detection means (38C, 38D) is performed. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M11, when the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means is performed, the second determination means determines whether an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. It is determined whether or not to Thereby, it can be determined whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is out of order. Here, the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means includes, for example, an operation check executed when the main power is turned on. Also, the operation chuck can be performed during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member is moved to the second position, whether or not the object exists is determined by the second determination means based on the detection result of one of the first detection means and the second detection means. By making the determination, it is also possible to check whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is normally operated. The operation check in Supplementary Note M11 includes not only the operation check performed when the main power is turned on, but also the operation check performed during the progress of the game.

10: Game machine 25: Panel 38: Detection sensor 38a: Upper left detection sensor 38b: Lower left detection sensor 38c: Upper right detection sensor 38d: Lower right detection sensor 38A: First main detection sensor 38B: Second main detection sensor 38C: First Sub-detection sensor 38D: Second sub-detection sensor 38E: Sub-detection sensor 341: Pattern display parts 39, 39C: Movable accessory member 392C: Display part 39A: Main movable accessory member 392A: Display part 39B: Sub movable accessory member 391B: Display unit 39a: Motor 39a1: First motor 39a2: Second motor 39b: Return detection unit 39c: Motor driver 4: Main controller 41: MPU
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
an image display means for displaying a variable display image in which decorative patterns are variably displayed;
a detection means that assumes a predetermined detection state when an object exists in a predetermined area that is on the front side of the image display means;
a movable member that is displaced between a first position and a second position;
displacement means for displacing the movable member;
with
When the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the detection means can be in the predetermined detection state,
an effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in progress of a game;
further comprising
The production executing means is
a first effect execution means for executing a corresponding first effect when the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacement means;
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means for a predetermined period of time;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the first effect is restricted during the predetermined period.

Images